You are on page 1of 536

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

Student Guide
September
2006

Manual History

Manual
Revision

.
2

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

Unigraphics
Version

Publication
Date

NX 4

March 2006

Contents
Course Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Intended Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Classroom Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Course Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NX Roles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Classroom System Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11
11
12
12
12
12
13

Gateway General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1


Starting NX Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Access to Load Options Dialog from the File Selection Dialog . . . . . . . 1-3
QuickPick Enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Activity - Using QuickPick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Combining of Selection Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Selection Control and Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Activity - Using NX 4 Selection Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Mouse Gesture Enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Radial Pop-ups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Activity Overview of Radial Pop-ups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Selection Intent User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
Activity - Using Follow Fillet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
Units Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28
Activity Using Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33
Multiple Graphics Windows [Windows platforms only] . . . . . . . . . . 1-38
Characteristics of Multiple Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-39
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-40
Gateway Customization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Toolbar and Menu Customization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Customization by Dragging and Dropping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Procedure: Customizing Toolbars/Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Activity Adding Options to a Toolbar and the Main Menu . . . . 2-9
Customizing the View Pop-up Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Customizing the Keyboard Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Roles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Default Roles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
NX2NX4 CAD Transition

Contents

User-Defined Roles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure - Creating a User Role . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Activity- Creating a User Role . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure - Creating a Group Role . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-22
2-23
2-25
2-27
2-39

Visualization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
View Rendering Style/Dynamic Hidden Edges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Rendering Style Pop-up Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Dynamic Hidden Edges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Highlight with Thick Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Dynamic Sectioning Enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
The Sectioning Definition Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Procedure: Creating a Section Cut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Activity Using Sectioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Some Sectioning Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Shade Exterior Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

Contents

Modeling General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1


Edit with Rollback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Part Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Feature Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Changes in Part Navigator Default Look . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Data Organization in the Part Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Model Views in the Part Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Procedure: Setting Up Model Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Interpart Dependencies and the Part Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Feature Sets/Grouping in the Part Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
DesignLogic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Activity Dimensionality in Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Measurements in the Expressions Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
Creating and Editing Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Measures and Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Activity Applying Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
Modeling Features, Part 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Extrude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Extrude Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Multi-Body Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Procedure: Simple Extrusion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Activity - Extruding with Offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Revolve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Display of Multiple Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Activity - Creating a Revolve Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Shell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Activity - Using Shell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Draft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
Draft Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
Activity - Creating Drafts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
Edge Blend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34
NX2NX4 CAD Transition

Contents

Activity - Variable Radius Edge Blend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


Chamfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Activity - Creating Chamfers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Datum CSYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Datum Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Activity - New Datum Plane Enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-36
6-43
6-44
6-47
6-49
6-52
6-54

Modeling Features, Part 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1


Body Taper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Activity - Creating a Multi-body Taper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Trim Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Activity - Examining the New Trim Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Dart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
The Dart Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
Activity Creating a Dart Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22
Replace Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37
Activity - Replacing Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-43
Modeling Free Form Features, Part 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
B-Spline Curve Smoothing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Activity Smoothing a Spline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Surface Pole Smoothing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Activity Using Pole Smoothing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Surface Trim and Extend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
The Trim and Extend Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Activity Surface Extend and Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Grid and Section Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24
Rough Surface Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-39
Activity Exploring Silhouette Flanges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-47
3D B-Spline Construction and Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-52
6

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Contents

Defining Point and End Pole Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


Activity Spline Creation Enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3D Spline Construction By Poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-53
8-55
8-62
8-83

Modeling Free Form Features, Part 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1


Emboss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Emboss Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Activity - Creating an Emboss Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Divide Face . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13
Activity - Using Dividing Face . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
Variational Sweep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
Activity - Creating a Variational Sweep Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
Polygon Subdivision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
Offset Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
Activity - Creating an Offset Surface from Sewn Surfaces . . . . . 9-26
Activity - Creating Offset Surfaces Using the Allow Step
Boundaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35
Modeling Sketcher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
Unconstrained Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Inferred Constraint Settings Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Dimension Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Activity - Editing Sketch Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
Part Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
Activity - Grouping Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
Editing Sketch Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
Sketch Color Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
Sketch on Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
Sketch on Path Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
NX2NX4 CAD Transition

Contents

Activity - Sketch on Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


Intersections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sketch in Member View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10-16
10-18
10-19
10-20
10-21

Modeling Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1


Associative Basic Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Activity Creating Associative Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
Other Associative Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11
Associative Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12
Activity Creating Associative Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13
Offset Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-16
Offset in Face . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-17
Intersection Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-18
Activity - Intersecting Curves Using Two Sets of Objects . . . . . 11-19
Text to Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-24
Activity - Generating Text Along Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-25
Activity - Text On Face . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-29
Edit Curve Length and Trim Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-33
Activity - Editing Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-34
Project Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-52
Bridge Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-53
Activity - Bridging Two Curves on a Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-54
Geometric Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-61
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-62
Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Creating a New Parent Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Reference Sets Enhancement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
WAVE Geometry Linker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
Assembly Cut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-7
Assembly Cut Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-9
Activity Using Assembly Cut to Make a Cutaway Drawing for the
Vise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11
8

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Contents

Assembly Arrangements Enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15


Activity Arrangements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-22
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-51
Drafting Part 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
Adding Views to Drawing Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
View Creation Options Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3
View Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
MB3 Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
Procedure: Adding Perspective Views on Drawings . . . . . . . . . . 13-8
Creating Detail Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9
Procedure: Creating a True View Auxiliary View . . . . . . . . . . 13-11
Activity Adding Views to a Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14
Activity Using the Orient View Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-23
Creating Section Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-29
Stepped Section Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-30
Activity Creating a Section View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-31
Views From Other Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-37
Activity Adding a View from Another Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-38
Displaying Specific Components on Drawing Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . 13-40
Activity Displaying Components on Drawing Sheets . . . . . . 13-41
Procedure: Displaying Arrangements of Assemblies . . . . . . . . . 13-46
Inspection and Reference Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-47
Drawing Sheets With Raster Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-48
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-49
Drafting Part 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
Sketch in Drawing Member View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Activity - Creating a Sketch in Drawing View . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Detail/Parent View Enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Datum on Centerlines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Datum Extension Line Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NX2NX4 CAD Transition

14-2
14-3
14-7
14-8
14-9
9

Contents

Reassociate Leader Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-10


Activity - Selecting and Editing a Leader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-11
New Interface for Simple GD&T Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-13
Activity - Using the Feature Control Frame Builder . . . . . . . . . 14-15
Streamlined Ordinate Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-18
Activity - Using the Enhanced Ordinate Dimension Tool . . . . . 14-19
Activity - Creating Automatic Ordinate Dimensions . . . . . . . . . 14-29
Displaying Assembly Arrangements in Base Drawing Views . . . . . 14-35
Tracelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-36
Activity - Creating Tracelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-37
Section Lines without Section Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-46
Non-Associative Drawing Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-47
Empty Drawing Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-48
Inheriting Centerline Angles from Auxiliary Views . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-49
Activity - Creating Angled Centerline Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-50
Dimensioning to Extension Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-53
Associating Leaders to Dimension Extension Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-54
Applying Thickness and Radius of Curvature Dimensions . . . . . . . 14-55
Activity - Applying a Thickness Dimension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-56
Screen Positioning Cylindrical Centerlines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-58
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-59
PMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1
The PMI Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2
Activity - PMI Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-4
PMI Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-14
The PMI Annotation Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-15
Activity - Defining the PMI Annotation Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-17
Inheriting PMI Data into a Drafting View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-26
Procedure: To inherit PMI annotations into a drawing view . . . 15-27
Activity - Inheriting PMI Data into a Base Drawing View . . . . 15-28
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-37
NX 2 to NX 4 Menu Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
Creating Lines and Arcs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
Basic Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Index-1

10

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Course Overview
The CAD Transition course is designed to familiarize users with the new and
enhanced functionality of NX 4 in relation to NX 2. It covers Gateway,
Visualization, various Modeling categories, as well as Assemblies, Sketcher,
Shape Studio, Drafting and PMI. There are brief activities where warranted.

Intended Audience
This course is intended for those making a conversion from NX 2 to NX 4.
It highlights the differences in design functionality between the different
NX versions.

Prerequisites

Basic understanding of NX 2

NX user interface

Basic understanding of Gateway

Basic understanding of Modeling

Basic understanding of Visualization

Basic understanding of Sketcher

Basic understanding of Shape Studio

Basic understanding of Assemblies

Basic understanding of Drafting

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

11

Classroom Parts

Classroom Parts
You do not have the system privilege to modify any of the parts provided with
this course. If you attempt to do so, you will get a system message saying that
the file is Read Only and that you cannot save the changes. However, this
does not restrict you from working on these files.
You can use the FileSaveAs option to save a copy of the current
part under a different name. This allows you to modify the part and
save the changes, if desired.

General Course Information


NX Roles
The activities in this course assume that you are using the Advanced with
full menus role. If your system is set to use a different role, you may see a
different set of icons and toolbars in NX. Roles let you control the appearance
of the user interface. In the case of the Essentials role, not all the toolbars
and icons referred to in this course will be turned on. That is because of the
extra space required in the toolbar to show the icon text.

How to Use This Manual


It is important that you use the Student Guide in the sequence presented
because later lessons assume you have learned concepts and techniques
taught in an earlier lesson. If necessary, you can always refer to any previous
activity where a method or technique was originally taught.
The format of the activities is consistent throughout this manual. Steps are
labeled and specify what will be accomplished at any given point in the
activity. Below each step are action boxes which emphasize the individual
actions that must be taken to accomplish the step. A toolbar icon may also
appear at the end of the action text indicating that you may perform the
same command from a toolbar icon. As your knowledge of NX increases, the
action boxes will seem redundant as the step text becomes all that is needed
to accomplish a given task.
Step 1:

Open the mypart part. (The prt extension is always assumed)


Select FileOpen.

While working through lesson activities, you will experience a higher degree
of comprehension if you read the CUE and Status lines.
12

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Course Overview

It is recommended that students who prefer more detail from an Instructor


Led Course ask questions, confirm with restatement, and, more importantly,
attend and pay attention to the instruction as it is given.
Obviously, it is always necessary for students to consider the classroom
situation and be considerate of other students who may have greater or
lesser needs for instruction. Instructors cannot possibly meet the exact needs
of every student.
At the start of each class day you will be expected to log onto your terminal
and start NX, being ready to follow the instructors curriculum. At the end of
the days class you should always exit NX and log off the terminal.

Classroom System Information


Your instructor will provide you with the following items for working in the
classroom:
Student Login:
Username: ________________________________
Password: _________________________________
Work Directory: ___________________________
Parts Directory: ___________________________
Instructor: ________________________________

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

13

Lesson

1 Gateway General
Purpose
This lesson will familiarize you with what is new in the NX 4 Gateway
application.
Objectives
After completing this lesson you will be familiar with the following topics:

Starting NX Applications

Accessing Load Options from File Selection dialog

QuickPick Enhancements

Selection Toolbar Enhancements

Mouse Gesture Enhancements

Units Control

Measurements

Creating Multiple Graphics Windows [Windows platforms only]

New Toggle in Message box

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

1-1

Gateway General

1
Starting NX Applications The Application menu has been replaced in NX 4 with a
Start menu, similar to Windows. The Start menu is located at the top-left
where you can easily find it. The common applications are placed at the toplevel menu and a complete list including more advanced applications are
placed under a cascade menu.

1-2

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Gateway General

Access to Load Options Dialog from the File Selection Dialog


A new button has been added to the Open Part File dialog. The Option
button will allow you to directly access the Load Options dialog from the
File Selection dialog. The availability of this option applies to both Windows
and to UNIX.
Windows:

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

UNIX:

1-3

Gateway General

QuickPick Enhancements
The user interface for the QuickPick menu has been enhanced in this release.
The QuickPick menu now consists of a dialog which clearly lists the objects
you can choose from.
NX 4

NX 2

Launching the QuickPick menu remains unchanged. Position the cursor over
the desired object and wait for the QuickPick indicator
(dot-dot-dot
appended) to appear. Click MB1 (left button) to display the QuickPick menu.
Once the QuickPick menu is displayed, you will have the option to specify
categories which will allow you to focus the available list.

1-4

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Gateway General

QuickPick Selection Preferences


The upper portion of the Selection Preferences dialog has been streamlined.
NX 4

NX 2

Some of the options were renamed while two of them were changed to be
controlled in a different manner as stated below:
NX 4
Cursor Radius
Cursor Crosshairs
Preview Selection
QuickPick on Delay
(QuickPick is automatically
near cursor)
(objects controlled
by Selection
toolbar)

NX 2
Radius
Crosshairs
Preselection
Automatic Confirmation
Place Quick Pick near cursor
Sketches/Bodies/Features &
All Objects

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

1-5

Gateway General

Activity - Using QuickPick


Step 1:

Use QuickPick to identify a selectable features.


Open the features part.
You want to select the chamfer at the left back of the part.

However, if you place the cursor on the face, the top face of the
block appears to be selected. Use QuickPick to identify and select
the chamfer.
Move the cursor to the middle of the chamfer and leave it
there until it turns into the QuickPick indicator (dot-dot-dot
appended).

The QuickPick indicator will appear if more than one object lies
under the cursor. In this case, the block feature and the chamfer
feature.

1-6

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Gateway General

Press MB1 to display the QuickPick menu.

Step 2:

Select the feature.


The QuickPick menu lists all objects that are available for
selection.
With your cursor located outside of the QuickPick menu, press
MB3 to traverse through the list of objects.
This allows you to cycle through the list to highlight the desired
object.
You can also use the arrow keys on your keyboard to move
up and down through the list.
Now, experiment with the category selection to filter the available
list.

Currently, the catalog is set to All Objects.


Choose the Features icon
features in the available list.

so that you only display

Using MB1, select the chamfer feature from the list.


-

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

1-7

Gateway General

1
There are several methods to selecting an object from the
QuickPick menu, you can click in the object list directly or
use MB1 or the <Enter> key when the desired object is
highlighted in the list.
The chamfer is selected.

Step 3:

1-8

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

Close the part.

mt10026_g NX 4

Gateway General

Combining of Selection Modes


Selection mode management has been revamped for NX 4 and works in
conjunction with the new QuickPick function. In previous releases, there
were three selection modes:
Select General Objects
Select Features
Select Components
In NX 4, these have been expanded and consolidated so that there is really
only one selection mode, with the ability to specify the top selection priority
using an option pull-down.
The following icons are available to
control the selection priority:
Top Selection Priority Feature
Top Selection Priority Face
Top Selection Priority Body
Top Selection Priority Edge
Top Selection Priority Component

In previous releases, you typically:

Set the selection mode

Set a filter (if desired)

Selected the object

If you were interested in selecting objects outside the explicitly specified


mode, you had to change modes. In NX 4, you can set the primary selection
mode you are interested in (components, for instance) and that is the priority
for selection, but you can also use QuickPick to select objects other than those
of the primary selection mode.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

1-9

Gateway General

Selection Control and Assemblies


In the case of assemblies, there are selection issues when it comes to working
between the Work Part and non-work parts.
When working in an assembly, if you are selecting objects within the Work
Part, selection priority works as outlined above, but if you select outside of
the Work Part, the selection priority becomes component regardless of
any other specified priority.
Example: If you have selection priority set to Feature and you place the
cursor over a face within the Work Part, then the feature the face belongs to is
the first selection candidate. If you place the cursor over a face on a non-work
part, then the component the face belongs to is the first selection candidate.
Selection Scope Control
To give you added selection control when working with assemblies, a scope
control option pull-down has been added to the Selection toolbar.

The two options are:

1-10

Entire Assembly this is the default; all selection priority schemes work
as outlined above.

Within Work Part Only this limits any selection criteria to the work
part; you will not be able to select components even if the selection priority
is specified as Component.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Gateway General

Activity - Using NX 4 Selection Modes


In this activity you will explore how the new combined selection modes work.
This is an exploratory exercise, no geometry will be created.
Step 1:

Set up the part to investigate selection modes.


Open the ant_sub_assembly part.
Make sure the Selection toolbar is available and that the Type
Filter is set to Any, Select Scope is set to Entire Assembly and
that theFeature Priority

option is the top priority.

Make anten_top the Work Part


Step 2:

Experiment with selection modes.


Move the cursor over the top of the antenna, avoiding the
dimpled indentations.

The Revolved feature highlights; note in the status line that


Revolved (0) is referenced.
Notice also that if you linger over the top with the cursor, you get
the QuickPick indicator.
Select the top.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

1-11

Gateway General

The QuickPick dialog comes up showing both the top priority


(Feature) and other possible selections.

If you had made your selection immediately, before the QuickPick


indicator appeared, the Revolved feature would have been selected
automatically.
Dismiss the QuickPick dialog without making a selection.
Move the cursor over objects other than the top.
Notice in the Status Line that only other components are
referenced; that is because all other potential selections outside of
the Work Part are automatically seen as a component priority
(see Selection Control and Assemblies above).
Change the selection scope control pull-down to Within Work
Part Only.
Again, move the cursor over objects other than the top. This
time no components or geometry are preselected or referenced. This
is helpful when selecting objects in the Work Part of an assembly
where other non-work part geometry may get in the way of a clear
selection.
Change the selection scope control pull-down back to Entire
Assembly.
Make ant_sub_assembly the Work Part.
When working with the assembly as the Work Part, components
again will take first priority when selecting, with any other priority
mode setting coming into effect after that.
Set the selection priority to Face.

1-12

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Gateway General

1
Position the cursor over the long cylindrical shaft of the
antenna and wait for the QuickPick indicator, then select.

Note that even though the selection priority is set to Face, that the
first priorities are components, then faces.
Step 3:
Step 4:

Experiment with the various priority settings to see how they work
in conjunction with other filtering options of the Selection toolbar.
Close the part.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

1-13

Gateway General

1
Mouse Gesture Enhancements More mouse gesture enhancements have been
implemented to provide quicker access to common functionality using simple
mouse gestures performed in the graphics window.
Dynamic Pop-ups Over Preselected Objects
You can now launch a dynamic pop-up (object-specific pop-up) on an object
without first having to select it when using Global Selection.
When an object is in a preselected (but non-selected) state (1), using MB3 will
launch the dynamic pop-up options (2) for that object

When a dynamic popup is invoked for a preselected object, any selected


objects will be deselected. The object for which the dynamic pop-up was
invoked becomes the selected object. This lets you know that the popup is
only servicing the newly selected object.

1-14

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Gateway General

View Rotation About a Preselected Object


You now have a more convenient way to redefine the center of rotation (COR)
for dynamic rotation. A new gesture, MB2-Hold, lets you redefine the center
of rotation at the closest possible location on the model; you can then just
"drag" for rotation about the new center of rotation.

MB2-Hold redefines the center


of rotation at the closest possible
location, where selected, on the
model.

Rotation around the new center of


rotation occurs while MB2 is held
down while dragging. This new
rotation gesture can be thought
of as a single mouse gesture:
"MB2-Hold-Drag".

Set Rotate Point is still available for defining a more point-specific


rotation center using the View pop-up for a view rotation
Mouse Wheel Zoom to Cursor Location
The view can now be zoomed about the location of the cursor when the mouse
wheel is used.

Mouse Wheel Zoom Up

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

1-15

Gateway General

Double Click on Selected Object for Default Action


Prior to NX 4, double-clicking on objects while in Global Selection (where
you select objects prior to invoking an operation to act on them) was only
supported for objects that were not already selected. Any other selected
objects would be automatically deselected while the object that was
double-clicked would become selected, with the Default Action being
performed on just that object.
In NX 4, the double-click gesture is also supported on already selected objects.
The behavior is essentially the same: all objects except the double-clicked
object are automatically deselected, and the Default Action is performed on
just that one object.

1-16

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Gateway General

Radial Pop-ups
Radial pop-ups provide fast access to important functions by allowing you to
quickly select graphic options instead of reading through text on a linear
menu.
Radial pop-ups can be used on preselected objects; you no longer have to
select an object to be able to interact with it. wherever you can access the
standard pop-up menu with MB3.

Object preselected MB3 + hold


yields radial pop-up

View pop-up still available using


Ctrl+MB3

Radial pop-up mimics options


available on regular pop-up
A radial pop-up displays up to eight small icon graphics that surround the
cursor location.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

1-17

Gateway General

1
These icons represent a subset of application-specific options you can choose
just as you would from a menu.

Which radial pop-up is displayed at any particular time depends on what type
of object is selected.
There is a neutral zone in the very center. Shared items for Object Specific
Popup (such as Edit Parameter or Properties) appear in a consistent location
regardless of the number of items in the popup list.

Squares 5, 6, 7, and 8 are generally reserved for


Task Specific Options, if task specific options appear
in the MB3 popup.

1-18

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Gateway General

Activity Overview of Radial Pop-ups


In this activity, you will experiment using radial pop-ups on different
aspects of a model.
Step 1:

Open the cdt_blender_inlet_fixture-02_ASSM part.

Step 2:

Orient View to a Trimetric view.

Step 3:

Verify available Radial component pop-ups using the Assemblies


application.
Start the Assemblies application.
With the cursor over one of the fixture lifting eye ring
components, hold down MB3.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

1-19

Gateway General

Because you are at the top assembly level and are using
Components, you get a subset of the MB3Click

Move the cursor straight up until the cursor is over the Mating
Conditions icon

, then release.

The Mating Conditions dialog comes up.


Cancel the Mating Conditions dialog.
Once you become familiar with the radial icon locations,
you do not need to wait for the radial pop-up to appear.
Press MB3 and before the system actually displays the
radial pop-up, move the cursor in the direction of the
desired option and release MB3.

1-20

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Gateway General

Using MB3Hold over the same lifting eye ring, release MB3
over Make Displayed Part.
The lift eye ring part is now the displayed part.

Step 4:

Check out various featurebased radial pop-ups.


Move the cursor over the blend feature of the lift eye part and
use MB3Hold to display the radial pop-up.

Note that because you are working on the feature level, you get
a different set of radial choices. Of course, different features
will yield different options.
Keep the cursor in the neutral center zone and release MB3 to
close the radial pop-up without selection.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

1-21

Gateway General

1
Move the cursor over the lower revolved body of the lift eye and
use MB3Hold to invoke a radial pop-up.

Again, the options available on any particular radial pop-up


depends on the feature selected.
Keep the cursor in the neutral center zone and release MB3 to
close the radial pop-up without selection.
Move the cursor into an area clear of geometry and use
MB3Hold to invoke the radial pop-up.

Note that various view display options appear when there is


no geometry to select.
Close all parts when done.

1-22

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Gateway General

Selection Intent User Interface


In NX 4 the user interface for Selection Intent has been updated to:

Make selection interface options more discoverable

Make selection interaction more fluid

Remove obsolete dialog options

Selection Rule Terminology


There has been a revamping of selection terminology for NX 4:
Curve Selection Rules
Legacy Terminology
NX 4 Terminology
Single
Single Curve
Add Connected
Connected Curves
Add Tangent Chain
Tangent Curves
All Curves of Feature
Feature Curves
Add All of Face
Face Edges
Add All of Boundary Edges of Sheet
Sheet Edges
Body
Add Edges of Body
Body Edges
Add All Edges of Vertex
Vertex Edges
Add All Tangent Edges of Vertex
Vertex Tangent Edges
Any
Any
Face Selection Rules
Single Face
Single Face
Add Tangent Faces
Tangent Faces
Add Adjacent Faces
Adjacent Face
Add Feature Faces
Feature Faces
Add Body Faces
Body Faces
Add Region Boundary
Region Faces
Add Region Tangent Faces
Tangent Region Faces
Selection Intent Previewing Rules
In previous releases, whatever selection rules were specified (curve or face),
when the cursor was positioned over the seed object, it was highlighted.
When the seed object was selected, the selection rule (Add Connected, Add
Tangent Chain, for example) would be carried out .
In NX 4, this behavior has been changed so that you can preview the proposed
result of the selection rule before it is actually implemented. So now, when
you position the cursor over the seed object, the proposed selection rule will
highlight all objects to be affected by the rule and will highlight and have a 3
pixel line width; the rule is not acted upon until the seed object is selected.
-

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

1-23

Gateway General

Selection Intent Options Dialog


Some options have been removed from the Selection Intent Options dialog.
The Chain and Chain Tangent options have been removed since they are
superseded by Add Connected and Add Tangent Chain. The old options of
Chain Between and Tangent Angle have remained.
NX 2

NX 4

Note also that Stop At Intersection has moved from the dialog to the toolbar
and a new option, Follow Fillet, has been added.

1) Face rules same as previous versions of NX


2) Curve rules same as previous versions of NX
3) Stop At Intersection
4) Follow Fillet
5) More opens options dialog; same as previous versions of NX

Follow Fillet
The new Follow Fillet option on the Selection Intent toolbar provides the
ability to automatically follow (and leave) a fillet or any circular curve for
functions that require a section such as extrude or revolve.
Follow Fillet maintains design intent while reducing the number of selections
necessary to define a section that is based on a sketch with a lot of fillets and
whose component lines have not been trimmed.

1-24

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Gateway General

Activity - Using Follow Fillet


The intent here is to create an extrusion by defining a section that uses the
tangent curves on all the corners of the sketch without having to use Stop At
Intersection or trim any geometry.
Step 1:

Open the follow_fillet part and make sure the Modeling application
is started.

Step 2:

Use Follow Fillet for selection.


Choose the Extrude icon.
If you do not see the Selection Intent toolbar, you must
make sure that it is turned on.
In the Selection Intent toolbar, set the curve selection option to
Tangent Curves.
The Follow Fillet icon becomes activated.
Choose the Follow Fillet icon
Select the upper right fillet as the start point of the selection.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

1-25

Gateway General

1
As soon as the selection is made, the curve rule, i.e. Tangent
Curves, acts in conjunction with the Follow Fillet option to select
all the curves that are tangent and use fillets.

Choose the OK icon

to accept the default extrusion value.

Orient View to a Trimetric orientation.

Step 3:

1-26

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

Close the part.

mt10026_g NX 4

Gateway General

Units Control
In previous releases, the display of information was limited to the five
standard unit families. It is now possible to select your own custom units
based on your needs. You can set your own default unit through the Units
Manager. (AnalysisUnitsUnits Manager).
The Units pull-down will reflect this as Custom. The Custom unit name has
been added to the Units pull-down menu indicating that the default unit is
not one of the five standard unit families.
lb in
lb ft g
mm g
cm kg
m
Custom

The Units Information option is new for NX 4.


Units Converter...
Units Manager...
Units Information
Select this option and an information window will be presented. Units
Information will be always available for the user to obtain information on
current default units

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

1-27

Gateway General

Measurements
In NX 4, you can now measure distances, lengths, angles, volumes, and
areas interactively with visual feedback. When you enter a measurement
function, the system displays multiple measurement options in the graphic
display area allowing you to select the exact distance, angle, or volume that
you want to measure.

Measurements are part of the new NX 4 DesignLogic project which spans


across many applications. This means that in many functions in other
applications you can use Measurements as input for those functions.
Once you have generated a measurement, you can store the measurement for
later use as an expression to facilitate modeling within other functions.
Measurement designation is now achieved using new icon option bars.
Distance
Angle

1-28

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Gateway General

1
In addition, there are some new additions to the Analysis main menu
pull-down:

When any of these options are chosen, the icon options change:

All these options available through the icon option bar, although accessed in a
different way, are functionally the same as in previous releases. The Keep
Measure option
allows you to save the results of each measurement
process in your model.

Maximum Distance
You can now measure Maximum Distance between object types. The
interaction for maximum distance is the same as the current interaction for
minimum distance. After you select the first object, NX displays a ruler
showing the maximum distance.
The object types for Measure Maximum Distance are a subset of the types
supported for Minimum Distance. For maximum distance to a datum plane,
NX returns distance normal to the datum plane.

Radial Distance
Radius distance measure allows you to measure the radius of an arc or a
circle in a single click.
Measure the radius of an arc, circle, or circular edge. Upon selecting an
arc, the ruler displays the distance from the center of the arc to the pick
point on the arc. You then can choose OK. If you select a different arc, the
measurement changes to reflect your new selection. The distance displays in
current length units

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

1-29

Gateway General

Measurements and the Part Navigator


Once a measurement is kept, it is available in the Part Navigator in the
Measures folder, along with its corresponding dependencies and details.

Measurements and the Expressions Editor


Measurements that are kept are also available as expressions in the Modeling
application. The Expressions Editor now has a special listing option for
measurement expressions which lists the characteristics of the individual
measurements.

1-30

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Gateway General

1
In addition to listing Measurements that have been kept, you can also
create Measurement expressions directly from the Expressions dialog using
the Measurements pull-down located in the More section of the dialog.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

1-31

Gateway General

Measurements and Modeling Functions


In addition to storing Measurements as modeling expressions, the same
measurement options that are available through Analysis are available "on
the fly" to facilitate the creation of new expressions.

For more information regarding using Measurements while modeling,


see the Modeling-General section of this course.

1-32

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Gateway General

Activity Using Measurements


In this activity, you will experiment with several of the Measurement
options.
Step 1:

Open the cdt_base_measurement part.

Step 2:

Check out the options on the Measurements toolbar.


Choose the Distance icon
AnalysisDistance.

on the Analysis toolbar or choose

Click on the options arrow on the Distance option.


Step 3:

Generate a Distance Measurement.


Select the Distance option.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

1-33

Gateway General

Select, in order, the edges shown.

Once you are satisfied with your selection, choose the Keep
Measure icon
Step 4:

then click MB2.

Check the Measurement entity.


Open the Part Navigator by using the Part Navigator tab
on the resource bar.
Make sure Timestamp Order is off.

1-34

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Gateway General

Expand the Measures node down a couple of levels.

Note the relationship of the objects of the measurement you


just performed.
Select the DISTANCE MEASUREMENT in the listing, then open
the Dependencies and Details panes in the Part Navigator, if
necessary.

Of course more dependency information can


be obtained here by using:
Detailed View
Expand Next Level

Step 5:

Check the saved Measurement in the Expression Editor.


Start the Modeling application.
Choose ToolsExpression.
Choose the More Options arrow to open the listing window.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

1-35

Gateway General

Set Listed Expressions to Measurements.

Step 6:

Use Measurement to create an expression.


In the lower part of the Expressions Editor, set the type
pull-down to Mass.
Set the units pull-down to grams (g).

In the Name field, type base_mass.


Use the Measure Distance pull-down and select Measure
Bodies.

Select the extruded body in the graphics area.

1-36

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Gateway General

1
Use the pull-down in the graphics area to set the measurement
to Mass.

Choose OK.
Notice in the Expressions Editor that all the Measurements
needed to determine the properties of a solid body were created.

Step 7:

Close the part.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

1-37

Gateway General

Multiple Graphics Windows [Windows platforms only]


In NX 4 you have the ability to set up multiple graphics windows for the
current displayed part, enabling you to see and work on your displayed part
from different angles.

1-38

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Gateway General

Characteristics of Multiple Windows

You can have as many multiple windows as you want.

The active window can be changed simply by clicking in a different


window, by selecting a different window listing in the Window menu
pull-down or by using Ctrl+F6 or Shift+Ctrl+F6 to move to the next or
previous graphics window in the focus stack.

You can maneuver the windows manually or use the Tile or Cascade
options in the Window menu pull-down.

Selection interactions can be performed in any window.

Viewing interactions (zoom, rotate, fit, display mode etc.) can be


performed in any window.

Static and dynamic graphic input fields move to the window that is made
active.

Multiple Windows currently available in Gateway and Modeling.

Static and dynamic input fields move and work between multiple graphic
windows.

Procedure: Multiple Windows


To specify multiple windows:

Choose Window New Window.

In the New Window dialog that appears, select a view in the model to be
the new window and OK.

Optional: Change how the multiple windows are configured in graphics


area:
Window Tile
Horizontally Window
Tile Vertically Window
Cascade

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

1-39

Gateway General

Summary
In this lesson you:

1-40

learned about the new Start option for NX Applications

became aware that you have access to the Load Options dialog from File
Selection

were given an overview of the new QuickPick enhancements

became acquainted with how Select Modes have been combined and
enhanced

learned how to use Radial icon pop-ups.

were given an overview of enhanced Units control

learned about the new Measurement tools.

demonstrated the uses of Multiple Graphics windows.

learned about the new Toggle in Message box

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Lesson

2 Gateway Customization

Purpose
This lesson introduces the new changes and enhancements to customize the
user interface in NX 4.
Objectives
After completing this section, you will be familiar with the following
enhancements in the gateway functionality.

Toolbar and Menu Customization

Roles

Customer Defaults

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

2-1

Gateway Customization

Toolbar and Menu Customization


In the NX 4 Customize dialog, some of the panes invoked by the tabs are
changed.

Toolbars Page
The Toolbars page now contains options to create a new toolbar or delete a
toolbar.

The Save Layout and Reset Layout options have moved to a new Layout page
in the Customize dialog:

2-2

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Gateway Customization

Commands Page
The Commands page has changed slightly; in NX 4 you can customize
toolbars by dragging and dropping (more about this later).

Options Page
The Options page is still where you can define icon preferences.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

2-3

Gateway Customization

NX 4 now remembers how often you use certain menu options and will reflect
your frequently used options in your "folded", or truncated menus.
Show Full Menus After a Short Delay: is the default condition. This means a
truncated, or "folded" menu will display fully after a few moments:
"folded" menu
full menu

Reset Folded Menus rolls back all folded menus back to the default condition
(i.e. menu frequency of usage is reset).
The options that control Cue/Status line position and docking are now on
the Layout page.

2-4

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Gateway Customization

The cue/status line continues to be available in both a top and bottom docked
location. For NX 4, the top location is now specified as just above the graphics
window. When this option is set it will take effect immediately and will not
require you to restart your session.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

2-5

Gateway Customization

Customization by Dragging and Dropping


NX 4 provides you with the ability to rearrange items on NX menus and
toolbars to fit your method of working, making your NX session more efficient
for you to use. These changes are global and per session.
There are two basic aspects to interactively rearranging options within your
NX interface:

Dragging and dropping a toolbar item to the menu bar, menus and
cascading menus.

Dragging and dropping a menu item to a toolbar.

To drag and drop NX user interface objects (icons, menu options) you must be
in the Customize mode (the Customize dialog displayed).
When you first select the icon to be moved, you get a
small box at your cursor.
As you drag the cursor to your destination, you see the
box with an "X"; if you release MB1 at this point, you
will delete the icon.
Once you drag the box to a location where it can be
dropped, you see the "drop-in" bar showing you where
the icon will be placed.

2-6

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Gateway Customization

When you are in Customize mode, there are several other icon customization
options available by using MB3 over an icon.

These options determine the look of your toolbar along with some editing
options to further customize your toolbar.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

2-7

Gateway Customization

Procedure: Customizing Toolbars/Menus


To customize a toolbar:

2-8

Use the Toolbar Options arrows get to open the Customize dialog

Choose the Commands tab.

Using the Categories pane, navigate to the desired operation. The


corresponding commands will be listed in the Commands pane.

Select the desired command in the Commands pane (example: Fit) and
drag/drop it into the desired toolbar (1), menu bar (2), menu options (3) or
cascading menu (4).

Optional: Use MB3 over the command object (icon, menu option etc.)
being customized to change its default appearance, name etc.

Close the Customize dialog to exit the Customize mode.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Gateway Customization

Activity Adding Options to a Toolbar and the Main Menu


In this activity you will add options to a toolbar, move options from a
toolbar to the main menu and explore the various options of dragging
and dropping toolbar/menu objects to customize your interface. And,
of course, you are encouraged to experiment on your own as well.
Step 1:

Add options to a toolbar.


Choose the Categories tab.
Open the cdt_custom_1 part.
This is an empty part that you will use as a base from which
to start your customization.
Using MB3 and a Toolbar Options arrow, select Customize
from the menu. You are now in
Customize mode.
Using the Toolbars tab, make sure that the View toolbar is on.
You may want to un-dock the View toolbar to see the
following action better.
Choose the Commands tab.
In the Categories pane, expand the View node and select
Operation; the available commands for your selection will
appear in the Commands pane.
Scroll down the Commands list and Select the Section
command and while holding down MB1, drag the command to
the very front of the View toolbar:

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

2-9

Gateway Customization

Release MB1 to insert the option in the toolbar.

2
You decide you want the Section icon to reside in the main
menu bar just ahead of the Tools option, not in the View
toolbar. You have two options:
You can select the Section command from the Commands pane
of the Customize dialog and drag/drop it up in the menu bar,
much like you did for adding it to the View toolbar.
You can select the Section icon from the toolbar where you just
added it and drag/drop it up in the menu bar.
For the sake of experience, you will do the second procedure
here.
Step 2:

Drag a toolbar item to the menu bar.


Using MB1, select the Section icon from the View toolbar.
keep the mouse button pressed down.

With MB1 still pressed down, drag the icon up to the main
menu until you see the drop-in bar just in front of the Tools
option.

Release MB1.
Note that you now have the Section icon in your main menu.

Did you notice cursor symbols change as you did your drag
and drop?
Did you also notice that the icon was physically removed from
the View toolbar?

2-10

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Gateway Customization

If you had used the second method mentioned above, i.e.


dragging the option from the Customize dialog, the result
would have been that you would have the Section icon in
both places; that is, both in the View toolbar and on the
menu.
Conversely, just as you can drag/drop a toolbar icon to a
menu, you can drag/drop frequently used menu options
into toolbars to facilitate your workflow.
Step 3:

Create separators to form groups of options.


Using MB3, select the Zoom icon
pressed down.

; keep the mouse button

From the pop-up, select the Begin Group option.

How the toolbar displays depends on if groupings of


icons between separators can be displayed on the
toolbar at its current size. If you increase the width
of the toolbar by dragging, you will see a vertical
separator.

The Begin Group to create separators also works on


the menu bar.
Experiment with the above procedure, practicing placing
separators in several locations in the toolbar and/or the menu
bar.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

2-11

Gateway Customization

Step 4:

Remove separators.
Using MB3, select the Zoom icon
toggle off the Begin Group option.

in the toolbar, then

Repeat the above procedure, practicing removing separators


you have created.
Step 5:

Add a menu bar option to a toolbar.


Select the Commands tab in the Customize dialog.
Select the Menu Bar entry in the Categories pane.
Select the Information entry in the Commands pane; keep the
mouse button pressed down.
With MB1 still pressed down, drag the selection to the View
toolbar, positioning it as the last item in the toolbar, then
release MB1.

If you do not want the whole cascade menu of a menu bar entry,
but just one option from the cascade, you can do this using the
Customize dialog.
Step 6:

Add a single item from a menu bar option list to a toolbar.


In the Customize dialog, click on the Analysis entry in the
Categories side of the dialog.
The commands associated with the Analysis option are
displayed in the Commands pane.
Using MB1, select the Angle entry in the Commands listing
window; keep the mouse button pressed down.

2-12

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Gateway Customization

With MB1 still pressed down, drag the entry over to the View
toolbar, positioning it after the Information entry you just
added, then release MB1.

2
You now have the AnalysisAngle option available on the
Utility toolbar.
In a similar fashion, you can drag/drop a cascade menu of a menu
bar option into a toolbar.
Again, this is done using the Customize dialog; the only difference
is that you select a Commands option that has a right-arrow
signifying that it has cascade options.
Step 7:

Add a menu bar cascade to a toolbar.


In the Commands pane, select the Edit entry in the Categories
pane.
In the Commands pane, select the Undo List command (it has
a right-arrow signifying more options).

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

2-13

Gateway Customization

Drag the Undo List entry over to the View toolbar and drop it
in as the last item in the toolbar
You now have a second-level cascade menu from the main menu
in your toolbar (the Information menu you added earlier was
a top-level menu).

Step 8:

Create your own custom toolbar.


You should still be in Customize mode (Customize dialog
displayed).
Choose the New option.
The Toolbar Properties dialog is displayed.
In the Name field, type my_gateway_toolbar1_***, where ***
are your initials.
Turn the Always Available switch off.
Turn the Gateway switch in the listing window on.

Once you create this custom toolbar, it will only be available in


whatever applications are checked (in this case, Gateway).
2-14

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Gateway Customization

OK the dialog to create your (empty) custom toolbar.


This empty toolbar is hard to manipulate until you add
some functions.
Using the technique you learned earlier, add the following
items to your toolbar.
Categories
Preferences
Format
Tools
View

Commands
Visualization
Layer Settings
Part Navigator
Layout

Once you get your options into the toolbar, stretch its width
so you can see its title.

In the Categories pane, scroll down and select New.


In the Commands pane, select the New Menu > entry and
drag/drop it as the last item in your my_gateway_toolbar.

With the cursor over the New Menu entry, use MB3 and key in
a new Name of my_menu_1, then Enter.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

2-15

Gateway Customization

Using techniques you learned earlier, add some of your favorite


commands to your my_menu_1 pull-down.
The New Menu option can be used to create custom
menus on the main menu, not just in toolbars.

Choose the Toolbars tab in the Customize dialog.


Scroll down the list of functions until you see
my_gateway_toolbar_***.

The Properties option provides you with a means of renaming


the custom toolbar and to make it available to other
applications. The Delete option deletes the toolbar entirely.
As you can see, the new NX 4 customization tools provide you with
the ability to create an interface to streamline your work.
Step 9:

Experiment some more on your own. When you are finished:


Delete any custom toolbars you have made.
Close the Customize dialog.
Close the part when finished.

2-16

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Gateway Customization

Customizing the View Pop-up Menu


The View pop-up menu is now customizable. A View pop-up toggle button has
been added to the Customize dialog Toolbar page.
Procedure:
1. Activate the Customize dialog and select the Toolbars page.
2. Select (toggle on) the View pop-up button. The View pop-up menu is
displayed.
3. Items can be added/removed by dragging/dropping or by using the Add or
Remove Buttons menu (accessed from the icon in the title bar).

The content of the View pop-up menu is application dependent so any


changes made to this menu will only be remembered in the current
application.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

2-17

Gateway Customization

Customizing the Keyboard Shortcuts


You can customize your own keyboard shortcuts. You can define global
shortcuts or shortcuts that are specific to the current application.

A new dialog provides the interface to customize keyboard accelerators. This


is accessed from the CustomizeCommands tabKeyboard option.

Procedure:
1. Use the Categories list (1) to navigate to the desired command.
2. The Command list (2) will display the command name and the command
ID of the currently selected item (from the Categories list).
3. Current keys (6) lists shortcut keys that are already assigned to the
command selected in the Categories list (1). The Used in column will
indicate if the shortcut key is global or applicationspecific.
4. Place your cursor in the new shortcut key field (3) and enter a valid
shortcut key combination on your keyboard.
If you enter a shortcut key combination that is already being used,
a message will appear. You can still continue to reassign the key
combination but the previous assignment will be removed.
5. Determine if your shortcut is to be a Global or an application-specific
shortcut by setting the drop down menu (4).
6. Choose the Assign button (5) to create the new shortcut key.
2-18

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Gateway Customization

Roles
In NX 4, new portals to NX functionality called Roles have been implemented
for organizing various workflows and making NX easier to use by offering

discreet tool sets that pare down NX into logical groups of functionality.

In addition, you can create individual user roles based on your own
customized NX session interface, or roles can be defined based on specific NX
needs of various departments or disciples within a company and be added as
separate, protected role palettes. You can also access legacy .mtx files.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

2-19

Gateway Customization

Default Roles
By default, when you begin an NX 4 session you are presented with a core
set of functionality but more specific Roles (sets of tools) can be accessed

through the resource bar.


The categories of roles are:

Last Release Existing user.mtx customized interface from the previous


NX release

System Defaults Predefined roles streamlined based on general NX


functionality
Name
Essentials

Characteristics
Toolbars displayed
with function titles

Essentials with full


menus

Advanced

Advanced with full


menus

Audience
Entry level and
general NX
users.

Toolbars and menus Users who use NX


have truncated
infrequently
functionality
All of the above but Users who need
with full menus
basic functionality
with complete menu
options
Wider set of tools
Those needing extra
tools
Toolbars display
only icons, no titles Those familiar with
NX toolbar icons
Menus have hidden
options
All of the above but
with full menus

Those who
need advanced
functionality with
complete menu
options

2-20

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Gateway Customization

Industry Specific Out of the box predefined roles streamlined based on


NX functions used in specific industries.
Name
BIW (Body-In-White)
Essentials
Consumer Products
Essentials

Characteristics
Toolbars displayed

with function titles

Toolbars and menus


have truncated
functionality

Wider set of tools

Toolbars display
only icons, no titles

Machinery Essentials
Powertrain Essentials
BIW (Body-In-White)
Advanced
Consumer Products
Advanced
Machinery Advanced
Powertrain Advanced

Audience
Entry level and
general NX users.
Users who use NX
infrequently

Users needing extra


functionality
Users familiar with
NX toolbar icons

Menus have hidden


options

These prepackaged roles represent a starting point from which you can
customize the NX user interface and save as a personal role.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

2-21

Gateway Customization

User-Defined Roles
It is important to understand that as a user, there are two different
repositories where user-defined roles can be defined:

The User folder where you can store your individual roles that reflect
your personal user interface layouts with their specific menus, toolbars
etc. Note the specific resource bar tab and the title of the fly-out window.

Because these personal roles are yours, the .mtx files that define your
roles reside in your home directory.
In Windows, these roles reside in:
\Documents and Settings\<yourname>\Local Settings\Application
Data\Unigraphics Solutions\NX4\roles
In Unix, these roles in:
<your home directory>/NX4/roles

You can also define roles as a new palette which references roles in a
directory of your designation. Note the specific resource bar tab and the
title of the fly-out window.

It is anticipated that many companies may want to use these palette-ed


roles as a place to define departmental/group roles and put permission
restrictions on their respective directories, thus providing user
interface layouts that pertain to the special needs of the respective
departments/groups.
2-22

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Gateway Customization

Procedure - Creating a User Role


It is important to have all the toolbars set the way you want them
prior to creating a role. If you decide later you want additional
customizations saved with a specified role, you will have to recreate
the role.

Choose the Roles tab on the resource bar.

In a blank area of the Roles palette chick MB3. This will bring up the
pop-up

Click on New User Role in the pop-up. This brings up the Role Properties
dialog.
1. Name of the .mtx file as
stored
2. Name of Role as
referenced in
your NX interface
3. Graphic to be used as
Role icon; type in name
or Browse
4. Area to provide a
description of the role.
5. Window showing
application(s)
referenced in Role
6. Toggles to structure
Role; Current Only
is used to capture a
customized interface

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

2-23

Gateway Customization

OK to create new User role.

2-24

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Gateway Customization

Activity- Creating a User Role


In this activity you will create a user role in the most straightforward manner.
Step 1:

Open the roles_1 part.


The current icons and menu options reflect the base functionality
of Gateway when you start a new part.

Step 2:

Customize the toolbars and menus.


Choose the Roles tab
Roles pane.

on the resource bar and pin the

From the System Defaults folder, choose the Advanced role


icon.
OK the Load Role message
Using ToolsCustomize change your user interface (menus,
options, toolbars) however you will.
Please disregard the Roles tab on the Customize
dialog. This is discussed later.
Step 3:

Create a User role to store your customized user interface.


Click MB3 In the blank area of the Roles pane.
Choose New User Role.
The Role Properties dialog is displayed.

Step 4:

Define your User role properties.


In the Name field, key in role_1_xxx, where xxx are your
initials.
This is the name of your role as it will appear in the resource bar
Roles pane.
The name of the .mtx file (top of dialog) is system-assigned.
The name of your role must be assigned by you.
Choose Browse and navigate to the parts directory; thats
where the image files are.
Set the Files of type to JPEG files.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

2-25

Gateway Customization

Choose a role_image file, then OK.


In the Description field, key in the date <mmddyyyy> <your
last name, first name> first user role. (Example: 11032005
Doe, John first user role)

Your department will probably set description


standards in place for this data.
Turn the Current Only switch on.
Note here that the Current Only switch captures your
current, customized user interface, by application.
OK the Role Properties dialog.
Your User role is created.

Step 5:

2-26

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

Close the part.

mt10026_g NX 4

Gateway Customization

Procedure - Creating a Group Role


The procedure for creating a new palette of roles, perhaps for a department or
group, is somewhat different. An overview of the general procedure follows.
It is important to have all the toolbars, menus etc. set the way you
want them prior to creating a role. If you decide later you want
additional customizations saved with a specified role, you will have
to recreate the role.

Create a folder to store group roles in a writable directory.

Choose Preferences Palettes.

Choose the Open Directory as Role Palette icon.

Navigate to the directory you want the new Role palette to point to. This
creates a tab on the resource bar.

Use MB3Customize under the resource bar.

Customize your interface however you wish.

Choose Roles tab on the Customize dialog.

Choose Create.
-

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

2-27

Gateway Customization

Navigate to your roles directory

Name your role and OK

Give your role definition using the Role Properties dialog

Name of role
Image for icon
Description
Application switches / toggles

2-28

OK the definition of role properties.

In your newly created palette, use MB3Refresh to see the icon of


the new role.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX

Gateway Customization

Summary
In this lesson you:

became familiar with how to customize your toolbars and menus.

learned about new NX 4 Roles and how they can customize your interface

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

2-39

Lesson

Visualization
3

Purpose
To familiarize you with what is new in NX 4 Visualization functionality.
Objectives
After completing this lesson you will be familiar with the following
enhancements to visualization.

View Rendering Style which features dynamic hidden line updating

Highlight with Thick Width selection

Dynamic Sectioning Enhancements

Updated and Legacy Color Definition Files

Shade Exterior Faces

Advanced Studio Display (real time) shader

Environment Cubes Enhancements

Image Based Lighting

Real Time Shadows

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

3-1

Visualization

View Rendering Style/Dynamic Hidden Edges


View Rendering Style
The new view rendering style option provides choices that encapsulate
popular and productive view display settings.
In NX 4, the wireframe and shaded options have been rearranged into one
options pull-down, with a couple of new additions.

NX 2
Wireframe options

NX 4
Options

Visible Hidden Edges


Gray Thin Hidden Edges

Shaded with Edges

Dashed Hidden Edges

Shaded

Invisible Hidden Lines

Wireframe with Dim Edges

Shaded options
Wireframe with Hidden Edges
Shaded
Studio Display
Partially Shaded
Face Analysis Display
Face Analysis Display
Partially Shaded
Studio Display
Static Wireframe

3-2

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Visualization

Rendering Style Pop-up Menu


The View pop-up menu has changed to reflect the reorganization.
NX 2

NX 4

MB3Display Mode

MB3Rendering Style

Wireframe

Shaded with Edges

Shaded

Shaded

Partially Shaded

Wireframe with Dim Edges

Face Analysis Display

Wireframe with Hidden Edges

Studio

Static Wireframe

Studio

Face Analysis

Partially Shaded

MB3Hidden Edges

Visible

Gray Thin

Dashed

Invisible

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

3-3

Visualization

Dynamic Hidden Edges


In NX4, Wireframe with Dim Edges and Wireframe with Hidden Edges
show hidden edges and silhouettes that dynamically update whenever you
rotate the view.
Wireframe with Hidden Edges

Wireframe with Dim Edges

The new wireframe rendering styles avoid the inconvenience of having to


invoke Update Display to correct hidden edge and silhouette display after
rotating a view.

3-4

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Visualization

Highlight with Thick Width


In NX 4, curve and edge geometry is now displayed with thick lines (in
addition to applying a different color) during preselection or when highlighted
in order to distinguish it from other geometry.

Preselection
Selected (Highlighted)
Control of the Highlight with Thick Width option is on the Selection
Preferences dialog. It is enabled by default.

It is conceptually related to three other existing options for highlighting


display:

Shaded Views Edge Highlight

Analysis Views Edge Highlight

Highlight Hidden Edges

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

3-5

Visualization

Dynamic Sectioning Enhancements

In NX 4, Sectioning can now handle multi-plane intersections ("box"


sectioning) using six planes and you can use dynamic sectioning as a viewing
mode in which a you can actually work.
Input for manipulation of the section planes now uses the standard on-screen
data input and drag handles.

The orientation of the dynamic drag handles depends on the orientation of


the WCS.

3-6

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Visualization

The Sectioning Definition Dialog


You can launch the Sectioning Definition dialog from the icon options in
the upper right corner of the graphic screen. The defining parameters of
sectioning is done through this dialog which has five main sections.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

3-7

Visualization

Type The Type options let you determine how many planes (up to 6) to use
when sectioning your model.
1 plane

Sectioning is done using one clipping


plane which can be oriented using the
Section Plane icons.

3
2 plane
Sectioning is done using two clipping
planes which can be oriented using
the Section Plane icons.
Dynamic handles can be positioned on
either plane by selecting the desired
plane to be the active clipping plane.

Sectioning is done using a clipping


box which can be oriented using the
Section Plane icons.

Box

Dynamic handles can be positioned


on any plane of the box by selecting
desired plane to be the active clipping
plane.
Either all planes of the box or a
selected plane of the box can be
moved.

3-8

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Visualization

Section Plane/Volume
The Section Plane/Volume options let you determine the X,Y,Z orientation of
the section planes (in conjunction with the Type options). In addition, you can
invoke the Plane dialog to specify a sectioning plane to your specifications.
XC Plane Orientation

3
Sectioning is done using the XC axis
as the Normal clipping plane axis.

YC Plane Orientation

Sectioning is done using the YC axis


as the Normal clipping plane axis.

ZC Plane Orientation

Sectioning is done using the ZC axis


as the Normal clipping plane axis (the
default).

Invoke Plane Subfunction

Specify a plane orientation using the


Plane dialog.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

3-9

Visualization

Reset Bounds and Orientation


Flip Plane Normal
Toggles
Move 1 Plane / Move All Planes

This option works in conjunction with the 2 Planes and Box types. When
Move 1 Plane is in effect, one selected plane will be the clipping plane; when
Move All Planes is in effect, all planes (within the designated Type) will be
clipping planes.
When the tooltip of the icon reads Move 1 Plane, Move All Planes
is in effect. When the tooltip reads Move All Planes, Move 1 Plane
is in effect.
Toggle Sectioning On / Toggle Sectioning Off
This option allows you to toggle between a Sectioned display and a display
of the whole model. This option is also available outside of the dialog
through ViewOperationSection Toggle or by using the Section
Toggle icon

on the View toolbar.

Cap Display
The capping of clipped bodies provides a much better feel for the sectioned
model. There are four choices: No capping, Capping with a specified color,
Capping by Body Color and Body Color plus Interference.

3-10

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Visualization

Geometry Creation / Loading Options


You have several options that let you use the sectioning clipping planes to
either create datum planes and/or section curves. You can also use the
sectioning planes to facilitate the opening of component of an assembly.
Create Datum from Plane

Create Section Curves

3
Open Near Components on Plane
Open All Components on Plane

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

3-11

Visualization

Procedure: Creating a Section Cut

Choose ViewOperationSection.
For immediate sectioning, you can start manipulating the dynamic
sectioning handles using the default conditions

3-12

Optional: Specify the section Type

Optional: Specify the Section Plane/Volume

Optional: Specify the Cap Display

Optional: Specify a Geometry Creation/Loading Option

Close the Sectioning Definition dialog.

Choose OK to accept the specified section cut.

Optional: Use the Section Toggle icon


on the View toolbar or use
ViewOperation Section Toggle to go back and forth between
full model and sectioned model.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Visualization

Activity Using Sectioning


In this activity, you will experiment with some of the Sectioning
options.
Step 1:

Open the cdt_blender_inlet_fixture-02_ASSM part.

Step 2:

Create a Section while moving one plane of a section box.


Choose ViewOperationSection.

The default condition for sectioning is with a section box with


one clipping plane.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

3-13

Visualization

Drag the Normal translation handle (conehead) along the


normal vector until you have achieved a section in the middle
of the assembly.

3
Note that you could have input a distance/snap value in the
dynamic input box.
Step 3:

Change clipping planes of the sectioning box.


In the graphics area, define a right side section plane by
selecting an edge of the desired section plane.

Use QuickPick as necessary to identify the section


plane desired.

3-14

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Visualization

Again drag the Normal translation handle along the normal


vector.

3
Step 4:

Use the Dynamic Input field to rotate the clipping box 90 degrees.
Select the Y-Normal rotation handle, then key in an Angle of
90.

Note that when you are dragging the Normal vector,


you are moving the sectioning plane; when you rotate,
you are rotating the whole sectioning box.
Step 5:

Try out some of the Sectioning Definition Dialog options.


Set Cap Display to Body Color.
Click the Link Planes toggle

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

3-15

Visualization

Again, drag the Normal translation handle to section the


assembly in an upward direction.

3
Note that the capping color reflects the component body color
during sectioning, that the whole sectioning box moves, not just
one plane and that if you drag it up high enough, the bottom
plane of the sectioning box starts clipping the bottom of the
assembly.
Experiment on your own using the 1 Plane

and 2 Plane

Types.
Choose the Reset Bounds and Orientation icon
are finished experimenting.
Step 6:

Create section curves using a clipping plane


Choose the 1 Plane option

3-16

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

when you

under Type.

mt10026_g NX 4

Visualization

Choose the XC-Plane Orientation option


Plane/Volume.

under Section

Make Layer 5 the Work Layer.


Choose the Create Section Curves option.
OK the section cut.
With layer 5 the Work Layer, make all other layers Invisible

Step 7:

Close all parts

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

3-17

Visualization

Some Sectioning Considerations

1 and 2 plane sectioning work like they did in earlier releases.

Regardless of plane type used, there is one active plane at all times; the
"active" plane is the one displaying the Dynamic Positioning handles in
the center.

The last-used sectioning mode and active plane are remembered the next
time the Sectioning Definition dialog is launched.

3-18

The model is still all there even though part of it is not seen after
sectioning. In functions where selection is enabled, the object that
you hover over, expecting to pre-highlight often will not, because the
object that is being clipped out in Z is actually the one that would be
pre-highlighted. The "extraneous" objects show up in QuickPick.

Fit works on the entire model, not just on the subset of the model that
remains after sectioning.

It is not currently possible to photo-realistically render a clipped view. An


image will be generated of the entire model.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Visualization

Shade Exterior Faces


The Shade Exterior Faces option is has been added in NX 4 to improve
the shaded graphics performance when working with large models or
assemblies. The system selects external faces by identifying the non-occluded
faces and automatically setting them to be partially shaded. The display
is automatically set to the Partial Shading display mode, This option is
available on the Visualization Performance Preferences dialog under the
Large Model tab.

3
When the Shade Exterior Faces option is selected, the warning dialog below
will be presented.

The warning is stating that any previously set partially shaded faces will
be reset. The dialog is also pointing out that this operation may be time
consuming when initiated, depending on the size of the model or number
of faces.

Visualization

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

3-23

Lesson

5 Modeling General
Purpose
This lesson will familiarize you with what is new in the general use of the
NX 4 Modeling application.
Objectives
After completing this lesson you will be familiar with the following new
general functionality in the Modeling application.

Edit with Rollback

Part Navigator enhancements

DesignLogic

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

5-1

Modeling General

Edit with Rollback


The Edit with Rollback is now available for all features instead of the small
subset of features in earlier releases.
Use Edit with Rollback instead of Edit Parameters to reopen a features
creation dialog and roll the model back to its condition just before that feature
was created. Any feature that supports dynamic preview at creation time will
also have dynamic preview during edit, if you use Edit with Rollback instead
of Edit Parameters.
On the Modeling Preferences dialog (PreferencesModeling, General tab),
you can specify the option editing option that you prefer to see as your default.

5
Edit with Rollback is displayed on the MB3 pop-up menu for any feature
selected (or pre-selected) in the graphics window or Part Navigator.

5-2

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Modeling General

Part Navigator
The Part Navigator for NX 4 has undergone significant functional and user
interface enhancements; these include:

New feature names are now displayed to match the menu bar names
for features.

A Model Views node that helps you organize 3D annotations that depend
on their view locations. Model views include standard orthographic views,
view sets, and user defined views.

An Unused Items node where objects within the model that have no
parent-child relationship are stored.

The grouping of objects (including sketches) using the MB3 popup menu
of an object. You can edit groups or objects that you add to them from
elsewhere in the tree. You can add the same object to multiple groups.

Positioning dimensions of a feature are now displayed in the Part

Navigator and their values (which can be edited) appear in the details
window.

Upon selection, a features associated suppression expressions are shown


in the details window.

Dependency browsing for expressions.

When filtering is active, feedback is shown in the Part Navigators column


headers.

Dependency browsing is available for bodies. This shows the hierarchy of


tool bodies used to construct a model.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

5-3

Modeling General

Feature Names
The Part Navigator and other dialogs now show new feature names that
match the menu bar names for features.
Part Navigator with Old Feature
Names

Part Navigator with New Feature


Names

In most cases, name changes consist of:

a change from all capital letters with underscores to Initial caps with
normal spacing (e.g., RECTANGULAR_POCKET to Rectangular Pocket)

improved spelling of the functions (e.g., CPROJ to Curve Projection)

In some cases, feature names have been completely changed.


A few examples of changed names are listed in the table below.
NX 2 Name
TAPER
HOLLOW
BRIDGESRF_SHEET

NX 4 Name
Draft
Shell
Bridge Surface

BSURF_DEFORM

Deform

BSURF_ISOTRIM

Isoparametric Trim/Divide

If you wish to work with old-style names for a part for whatever reason, you
can set the preference on the Modeling Preferences dialog.

5-4

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Modeling General

Changes in Part Navigator Default Look


The default configuration of the Part Navigator has changed in NX 4. In
previous releases, the organization of the Part Navigator was in Timestamp
Order.

5
In NX 4, the default configuration is with Timestamp Order off.

When using legacy parts, be sure to turn Timestamp Order off to get
the Part Navigator in NX 4 format. The Part Navigator for any new
models will automatically be in the NX 4 format.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

5-5

Modeling General

Data Organization in the Part Navigator


There is a new organization scheme in the Part Navigator for NX 4. You will
notice new collections of different aspects of your model. These are meant to
organize your model to facilitate "browsing" your model for dependencies in:

Model Views

Features

5
Expressions

Reference Sets

Groups

Measures

Any features, reference features or objects that do not have parent/child


dependencies are put into the "Unused Items" folder.

5-6

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Modeling General

Model Views in the Part Navigator


You can use the Model Views node in the Part Navigator to manage and
organize model orientation as well as 3D annotations that depend on their
view locations.

Model views include standard orthographic views, view sets, and user defined
views. If you designate one of the views as the base view for a view set , all
the other views in that set update their orientations according to the base
view.
The View Set dialog lets you designate what views you want generated from
the current work view.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

5-7

Modeling General

Procedure: Setting Up Model Views

Identify a parent view by placing the cursor over the view node (under
Model Views) then use MB3Make Work View

Create a View Set by placing the cursor over the Model Views node, then
using MB3Add View Set.
The View Set dialog will appear.

Optional: Designate a Name for the View Set.

Optional: Designate a Base View other than default (Top).

In the View Set dialog, designate the views you want in the View Set
and OK.

The designated View Set will be listed in the Part Navigator

5-8

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Modeling General

Interpart Dependencies and the Part Navigator


Now WAVE linked features and sketches are referenced in the Part Navigator
in the Dependencies window.

Interpart Expressions Dependencies


In the case of linked bodies that share expressions, how their relationships
appear in the Dependencies browser depends on whether an expression is
referencing another expression or is the one being referenced:

Expressions which reference expressions in other parts show the


referenced part as a parent in the Dependency browser.

Expressions which are referenced by other loaded parts show the


referencing part as a child in the Dependency browser.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

5-9

Modeling General

Feature Sets/Grouping in the Part Navigator


There are a few changes/enhancements to the Feature Set/Grouping
functionality in the Part Navigator.

The ToolsGroup Features option has moved to FormatGroup


Features and an MB3 pop-up menu in the Part Navigator.

Groups can now be added to reference sets. Members of a group that do not
individually belong to any reference set but do belong to a group that is in
a reference set will behave as if they were members of that reference set.

You now can have sketches as a member within a group.

You now can have the same object in multiple groups.

5-10

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Modeling General

DesignLogic
In NX 4, there is a new project called DesignLogic that pervasively impacts
many design tasks that you might undertake. With DesignLogic, you can
more easily access, create, and associate parametric data as you build your
model.

This expanded capability is seen in:

Expressions

Detailed Features, Design Features, and much of the free form


functionality

User Defined Features

Analysis

Sketching

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

5-11

Modeling General

Feature Parameter Specification


In NX 4, you can now easily perform measurements and/or link them, create
and access expressions, create and access functions (e.g., sin, cos), and link
other parameters or data interactively while you create features.
This is done by selecting the parameter entry options arrows that
accompanies input fields in many dialogs. during creation or editing.

This method of parameter specification creates embedded measurements.

Measurements constructed in this manner are attached to the feature you


are creating.
The Input Options

window:

These options not only interactively determine measurements for input, but
also generate Analysis Object entities.

brings up the new Expression Formula Editor.

5-12

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Modeling General

brings up the Insert Function dialog.

Here, you can access functions, geometry, spreadsheet data, or defined rules.
lets you select geometry which, in turn, brings up the
Parameter Selection dialog.

5
This lets you reference the defining parameters of the geometry you selected.
The Measurement Options When you use the Measure option, you get an icon
options bar of measurement options (the same ones available through
Analysis).

These options may vary depending on the features that you are creating or
editing.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

5-13

Modeling General

Activity Dimensionality in Expressions


In this activity, you will use expression dimensionality to mix units within a
part.
The part consists of a 50 x 100 mm steel plate; however, some
dimensions are specified in inches.
The available stock to be used is .125 inch ground steel.
A drilled hole is required for a 1/420 UNC thread. The tap drill for
1/420 is an F drill, diameter .257 inches.
The tapped hole must be centered on the long dimension and 1 inch
from the long edge as shown.

5
Step 1:

Create a new mm part named ***_units where *** is your initials


and start the Modeling application.

Step 2:

Create an expression for the thickness.


Using the Expression dialog create a new expression by
entering the name: thick.
Make certain that dimensionality is set to length.

Use the units pull-down to observe the various units available,


and choose in (inches).
Key in 0.125 as the formula, accept the edit and choose OK.
5-14

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Modeling General

Step 3:

Create the block.


Use 50 mm as the Length (XC).
Use 100 mm as the Width (YC).
For the Height (ZC) choose parameter entry options.
Select Formula.
In the Expressions Editor set Listed Expressions to All.
MB3 on thick and select Insert Name. Then OK.

Notice that the expression was automatically converted to its


mm equivalent.
Notice also that the height text entry field is now insensitive,
and that the formula icon has replaced the parameter entry
options arrow for the height parameter.

Step 4:

Add 6 mm blends to two edges as shown.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

5-15

Modeling General

Step 5:

Add the hole.


Select the placement and through faces first.
In the diameter entry window type 0.257in (no space!) and
then choose OK.

Use a perpendicular dimension from either of the XC parallel


edges and the Formula parameter entry option to specify half of
the BLOCK Size Y dimension as the first placement dimension.
Specify another perpendicular dimension from the longest
edge, using the text entry window to specify 1.0in (no space).
Step 6:

Examine the expressions.


Set Listed Expressions to All.
Notice that only the thick expression was given dimensionality
in. The diameter and a positioning dimension have desired
unit value directly to the formula.

The numeric part of your system expression names


may vary from the illustration.

Step 7:

5-16

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

Close the part.

mt10026_g NX 4

Modeling General

Measurements in the Expressions Editor


Use the measurement options to obtain measurement values from objects in
the graphics window for your expression formulas.

When you obtain a measurement, an expression for it is created and inserted


at the cursor position of the expression formula you are editing. The
measurement expression is evaluated with the rest of the expression.
Measure Distance - Uses the Analysis Distance function to
measure the minimum distance between any two NX objects such
as points, curves, planes, bodies, edges, and/or faces. The system
calculates the three-dimensional distance and the two-dimensional
distance relative to the XC, YC plane.
Measure Length - Uses the Analysis Arc Length function to
measure the arc length of a curve or line. You can use selection
intent and section building to measure the length of a set of curves
between intersection points.
Measure Angle - Uses the Analysis Angle function to display angle
measurements between two curves, between two planar objects
(planes, Datum Planes or Planar Faces), or between a line and a
planar object.
Measure Bodies - Uses the Analysis Mass Properties function
obtain multiple expressions for volume, mass, radius of gyration,
centroid x, centroid y, centroid z, and surface area of solid bodies.
Measure Area - Uses the Analysis Face Properties function to
calculate area and perimeter values of body faces. The system
creates multiple expressions for area and perimeter.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

5-17

Modeling General

Creating and Editing Measurements


Common Options

When you choose Measure Length, Measure Bodies, or Measure Area the
above icon options bar displays. Measure Distance and Measure Angle
include these options and several more.
Information displays the specified measurement in the Information
window without actually creating an expression.
OK creates the measurement and the associated expression(s).
Cancel returns to the expression dialog without creating an
expression.

Distance Options

When you choose Measure Distance the Distance icon options bar appears.

Distance (the default) returns the three dimensional distance


between two selected objects.
Projected Distance returns the distance as seen in a plane
normal to a vector. The vector constructor appears.
Screen Distance is not available for the purpose of creating an
associative measurement.
Length provides the same interaction as Measure Length.
Radius returns the radius of an arc, circle or circular edge.

5-18

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Modeling General

Measure to a Point is not available for creating associative


measurements. Other functions give you the same abilities.
Minimum Distance is the default for measure distance.
Minimum Distance Local finds a local minimum (if one exists)
near the point you pick the object. For example, consider an
undulating spline curve with several local minimum distances to
a line.

Maximum Distancet finds the maximum distance between two


objects.

Angle Options

When you choose Measure Angle the Angle icon options bar appears.

By 3 Points allows you to select three associative points.


By Objects (the default) allows you to select two curves, two
planar objects, or a line and a planar object.
By Screen Points is not available for the purpose of creating an
associative measurement.
Object (the default) allows you to select objects as listed above.
Use Feature Direction when you want to determine the direction
of a feature such as a cylinder. When you select the feature, the
system indicates the direction with an arrow(s). is the default for
measure distance.
Vector constructor allows you to specify a direction.
3D Angle (the default) gives the true angle in three dimensional
space.
Angle in WCS XY Plane projects the selected angle to the WCS
XY plane.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

5-19

Modeling General

Inner Angle (the default) measures the angle inside the lines
of the angle
Outer (Major) Angle measures the angle outside the lines of
the angle

Measurements use the Analysis functions. They are documented


under GatewayGatewayMenu&DialogReferenceAnalysis.
If you want to save several stand alone measurements at one
time, consider using the Analysis function because it offers Apply
(Ctrl+MB2) to measure and continue. The analysis dialog offers
additional options to save the measure feature or create the line.

5-20

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Modeling General

Measures and Measurements


When you use the Expressions dialog to create a measurement you may think
of it as a stand alone measurement.
Stand alone measurements can be filtered in the Expression dialog. For every
stand alone measurement expression the system creates a Measure feature.

5
The Expressions dialog lists the value and units of each measurement, but
note that the formula column will always read (Measure). Measure refers
to the feature that was created. The name column will show the type and
timestamp of the measure feature, i.e.; distance; angle; and so on.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

5-21

Modeling General

Measure features can be seen in the Part Navigator under the Measures node.

When you highlight a measure feature in the Part Navigator the associated
measurement expressions and their values are listed in the Details window,
and the Measure is highlighted in the graphics window.
Measurements During Parameter Entry

5-22

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Modeling General

Activity Applying Measurements


In this activity you will capture some of the design intent with
measurement expressions.

Step 1:

Line A, an imaginary line, always starts and ends at the corners


as illustrated below.

Line B, the center line of the hole, is always 90 to Line A and


passes through Edge C.

The hole depth is always 80% of the F value.

The intersection of Line A and Line B is always located at the


center of Line A.

Create a new mm part and name it ***_measure (where ***


represents your initials).

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

5-23

Modeling General

Step 2:

Create a 100 x 100 x 250 block, locate it at 0,0,0, and Fit the view.

Step 3:

Create reference geometry to orient the hole feature.


Choose Datum Axis.
Select the two endpoints as shown below and choose OK.

5
Choose Datum Plane.
Select the two edges shown below and choose Ctrl+MB2.

5-24

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Modeling General

Select the datum plane and datum axis, enter 90 for the angle,
and choose Ctrl+MB2.

Select the new datum plane and the endpoint shown below
and choose MB2.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

5-25

Modeling General

Step 4:

Create a stand alone measurement expression.


This measurement will provide the "D" value:

Choose ToolsExpression, and if necessary choose More


Options.

Choose Measure Distance.


Select the endpoints as shown below and choose OK.
It might be useful to set the Snap Point options to limit
the types of points you can select. Only End Points are
necessary for this measurement.
For simplicity the new reference features are not
illustrated.

Set Listed Expressions to Measurements.


Notice the new expression has a value of approximately
287.2 mm, and the formula is (Measure). The name of the
corresponding feature appears in the Name column.
5-26

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Modeling General

In the Formula field to the right, select the X to remove the


p number.
Left click on the measured expression in the list portion of the
expressions dialog.
Rename the expression just created to diagonal.
Notice that when you select a stand alone measurement
expression only the name may be edited. The formula field is
insensitive.
The next measurement expression will be an embedded
measurement to control the depth of the hole.
Step 5:

Create the hole feature.


Recall that the hole depth must be 0.8 times the F value:

Choose Hole.
Make sure the Simple icon is selected.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

5-27

Modeling General

Select the last datum plane just created as the placement face.

Choose Reverse Side, if required, so the tool body intersects


the block.

Accept the default Diameter of 25 mm and the Tip Angle of


118 degrees.
To create an embedded measurement, choose Parameter Entry
Options beside the Depth entry field.

Choose Formula.

From the Expressions dialog choose Measure Distance.

5-28

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Modeling General

Select the datum plane and endpoint as shown below and


choose OK.

5
In the Expressions dialog, append * 0.8 to the formula for the
pending new Depth parameter. (The number after the word
distance may vary from the illustration.)

Choose Accept Edit.


Notice that the pending Depth expression now has a formula
of distance11*0.8. (The digits may vary.)

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

5-29

Modeling General

At this point the hole is not constructed therefore a system


parameter (p#) has not yet been assigned. The Name column
reads simply Depth.
Choose OK to return to the hole dialog.
Notice that the parameter entry field for the Depth is now
insensitive, and the parameter entry options icon has been
replaced by the formula icon. This indicates that a formula was
entered to control the depth.

Choose OK to create the hole.

Choose Point onto Line

and select the datum axis.

Choose Horizontal.
Choose the Datum Axis in the graphic window as the
Horizontal Reference.
Select the endpoint shown below as the target object.
For simplicity the reference features and pending hole
body are not illustrated.

5-30

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Modeling General

In the positioning dialog choose the parameter entry option


Formula for the current dimension.

Key in or use the Copy name method to edit the value of the
CurrentParm to diagonal/2 and choose OK.

5
This satisfies the design intent for the hole position.
When you return to the positioning dialog Apply the new
horizontal dimension.
Because the position is fully specified, the dialog will close and
the hole is created.
Step 6:

Edit the values of the block feature to test the design intent.
In the graphics window, place your cursor over the block until
it pre-highlights and chose MB3Edit Parameters.
Click over p2=250.00 in the graphic window.
Key in 125 and choose OK.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

5-31

Modeling General

Choose OK twice to update the model.


The solid body updates per the design intent.

Repeat the edit to make p2 equal to 500 and again update the
part.
The hole remains on the midpoint of the diagonal.

5-32

Step 7:

Optional: Examine the expressions that were created in the


Expressions dialog and in the Part Navigator.

Step 8:

Close the part.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Modeling General

Summary
In this lesson you:

Learned about the Edit with Rollback option.

Learned about various enhancements to the Part Navigator.

Learned how DesignLogic works across varying functions.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

5-33

Lesson

6 Modeling Features, Part 1


Purpose
This lesson introduces the new changes and enhancements to Features in
the Modeling application in NX 4.
Objectives
In this section, you will learn about the following enhancements in NX 4:

Extrude

Revolve

Shell (old Hollow feature)

Draft (old Taper feature)

Edge Blend

Chamfer

Datum CSYS

Datum Plane

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

6-1

Modeling Features, Part 1

Extrude
The Extrude function has undergone significant changes between the NX2
and NX 4 releases.
Dynamic Handles
Extrude now offers dynamic manipulation and input for the development
of extruded features.

Parameters display in the view when you construct or edit an Extruded


feature. The Offset and Draft parameters only appear if these options
have been turned on in the dialog.

6-2

You can also suppress their display by using F3 which is also used to
turn them back on.

You can also grab (MB1) and drag each field to a better position in the view.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Modeling Features, Part 1

Extrude Dialog
The Extrude dialog is used during creation and editing.

6
Specifying Geometry to Extrude
Select Section is for selecting objects to be extruded. This is now
a selectable selection step, making it easier to control the selection and
deselection of objects.

Sketch Section is for creating a sketch on the fly before you


extrude it.
Direction

Direction

Opens the Vector Constructor to let you define or


edit the direction of the extrusion. Also available
from the MB3 popup menu.

Reverse Direction

Lets you reverse the direction of the extrusion from


what is displayed by the preview. Also available
from the MB3 popup menu.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

6-3

Modeling Features, Part 1

Boolean
Lets you choose a boolean operation for the extrusion. You can also move the
cursor over the extrusion preview and use the MB3 popup menu to choose
a boolean option.
Create - Creates an independent
extruded solid body
Subtract

Unite

Intersect

Select Boolean Target - When available, use this option to select the
target for the specified Boolean operation.

6-4

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Modeling Features, Part 1

Limits

Converts the End distance to the same value as


Start
Symmetric Distance

Start / End

Value - Enter a fixed value in the data entry


field or in the dynamic input box. Or you
can drag a distance using the Start and End
handles. You can put the Start and End
values on either side of the profile.

Until Next - Extends the extrusion to the next


face, datum plane or body along the direction
path.

Until Selected - Extends the extrusion to a


selected face, datum plane, or body.

Through All - Extends the extrusion


completely through the selected body along
the extrusion path.

Through All - Extends the extrusion


completely through the selected body along
the extrusion path.

Trim - Lets you select a face, sheet body, or solid to mark the bounding
extent of the extrusion. This option is available only when you are creating
an extrusion using other objects to delimit its extents, instead of just
entering distances.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

6-5

Modeling Features, Part 1

Offset

Offset adds up to two offsets to the extrusion. Offset is available from the icon
options, from the dialog, or using MB3. Values can be entered in the data
entry fields, in the dynamic input boxes. You can also drag the offset handles
in the graphics window. You can specify symmetrical offsets.
1. End - Enter a fixed value in the data entry field or in
the dynamic input box. Or you can drag a distance
using the Start and End handles. You can put the
Start and End values on either side of the profile.
2. End Handle - Extends the extrusion to the next face,
datum plane or body along the direction path.
3. Start - Extends the extrusion to a selected face, datum
plane, or body.
Start / End

4. Start Handle - Extends the extrusion completely


through the selected body along the extrusion path.
5. Profile - Extends the extrusion completely through
the selected body along the extrusion path.
Symmetric - Makes the value of both offsets equal. The
value is determined by whichever offset option you last
specify.

6-6

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Modeling Features, Part 1

Draft

Draft is available from the icon options, from the dialog, or using MB3. The
taper angle can be entered in the dialog entry field, in the dynamic input box,
or by dragging the taper handle in the graphics window.

Creates draft that starts at Start limit, and extends to


End limit. You can add a simple taper to a non-planar
profile, as long as it is not a face or a sheet body.

Simple from Start

Creates draft that aligns with (or passes through) the


profile string, and extends to Start and End. You can
add a simple taper to a non-planar profile, as long as it
is not a face or a sheet body.
Simple from Profile

Uses a single angle value for tapers that extend both


above and below the profile. Available only if the Start
and End faces are on opposite sides of the profile, and
if the profile is planar.
Symmetric

Uses a single angle value for tapers that extend both


above and below the profile. The Start face is matched
with and becomes the same size as the End face.
Available only when the profile is planar.
Matched End
-

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

6-7

Modeling Features, Part 1

Multi-Body Feature
When you create an Extruded feature, where multiple loops exist, the result
of this creation is a single (multi-body) feature; whereas in previous versions,
this would have resulted in multiple features.
For example, if you create an Extruded feature in NX 4 using a sketch with
multiple loops, you will get a single multi-body feature. You can check this in
the Part Navigator. If you subtract, unite, or intersect the single (multi-body)
feature, the result must be a single body.
Example: NX4

Example: NX2

6-8

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Modeling Features, Part 1

Procedure: Simple Extrusion

Choose the Extrude option.

Optional: Set Selection Intent

Select a profile of curves or edges, or a sketch. A preview of the extruded


feature displays using default values.

If you need to change the direction of the extrusion, position


the cursor over the preview and use MB3Direction or
MB3Reverse Direction. You can also change the direction
using the Extrude dialog.

Optional: If you are dragging the input handles to develop the extrusion,
you may want to use F3 to turn off the dynamic input boxes.

Drag the Limit handles, or use the Distance fields in the dialog or in the
dynamic input boxes to size the extrusion as desired.

Dragging the End Handle (1) to


size the Extrusion

Click OK

The extruded feature is created.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

6-9

Modeling Features, Part 1

Activity - Extruding with Offsets


In this activity, you will create an offset extruded feature to examine
the Dynamic Extrude interface.

Step 1:

Open the cdt_extrude part and start the Modeling application.

Step 2:

Create a tube by extruding with an offset.

Choose the Extrude icon


on the Form Feature toolbar or
choose InsertDesign FeatureExtrude.
Select the inside, large circle as the section string.

6-10

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Modeling Features, Part 1

In the Dynamic Entry box, key 2.5, then Enter.

Change the Boolean option to Unite.


Toggle on the Offset option.
Enter .25 for the End (Offset) value and press Enter.
If the Offset drag handle is pointing away from the center of
the part, use a negative value for the End offset. If the Offset
drag handle is pointing toward the center of the part, use a
positive value.
Choose Apply.

Fit the view. (MB3Fit).

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

6-11

Modeling Features, Part 1

Step 3:

Create a flange at the top of the cylinder.


Select the top outer edge of the cylindrical extrusion.

Change the Boolean option to Unite.


Choose Reverse Direction
down.

so that the drag handle points

Enter .25 for the End (Limit) value and press Enter.
Toggle on the Offset option.

Enter .25 for the End (Offset) value and press Enter.
If the Offset drag handle is pointing away from the center of
the part, use a positive value for the End offset. If the Offset
drag handle is pointing toward the center of the part, use a
negative value.
Choose Apply.

6-12

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Modeling Features, Part 1

Step 4:

Subtract an extrusion from the flange.


Select the inside circular edge shown to extrude.

Change the Boolean option to Subtract.


Choose Reverse Direction
down.

so that the drag handle points

Enter .075 for the End (Limit) value and press Enter.
Toggle on the Offset option.
Enter .15 for the Start (Offset) value and .275 for the End
(Offset) value and press Enter.
If the Offset drag handle is pointing away from the center of
the part, use positive values for the offsets. If the Offset drag
handle is pointing toward the center of the part, use negative
values.
Choose OK.

Step 5:

Close the part.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

6-13

Modeling Features, Part 1

Revolve
The Revolve function and user interface is improved to work in a similar
way to that of Extrude.
There is no change in the function itself.

The dialog now includes three Selection Steps, the same as the Extrude dialog.

6-14

Select Section is for selecting objects to be revolved. This makes it


easier to control the selection and deselection of objects.

Sketch Section is for creating a sketch on the fly before you


revolve it.

Inferred Vector is for defining the vector for revolution. (The


small arrow at the right of the icon lets you access other vector functions.)

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Modeling Features, Part 1

Display of Multiple Parameters


All parameters display in the view, while you construct or edit the Revolved
feature.
You can select and drag each displayed parameter to a better position in
your view.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

6-15

Modeling Features, Part 1

Activity - Creating a Revolve Feature


In this activity, you are going to revolve all the edges in the front face, 45
degrees about the lower front edge of the part, and unite it with the existing
solid.
Step 1:
Open the revolve part and make sure the modeling application
is running.

Choose the Revolve icon

or InsertDesign

FeatureRevolve.

With the Select Section selection step active, select all the
edges in the front face of the part.

Use MB2 to complete the selection and advance to the next


selection step.

6-16

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Modeling Features, Part 1

Step 2:

Define the rotation axis.


With the Inferred Vector selection step active, select the lower
edge of the part,

Revolve it forward from 0 to 45 degrees.

6
Set the boolean operation to Unite
Select the existing solid body (to unite to).
Choose OK on the dialog.

Step 3:

Close all parts.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

6-17

Modeling Features, Part 1

Shell
The Hollow function has been renamed to Shell and the dialog and user
interface have changed.
The old Hollow "Types" interaction has been replaced with face sets to
manage input selections and their constituent roles. Face sets work like edge
sets in the Edge Blend function.

Body is used to select the body to be


used for the shell.
Remove Faces is used to select faces to
be removed.
Alternate Thickness List is used to
specify alternate thicknesses. The list is
similar to the old Alternate Thickness list.
The Complete set and start next set icon
is displayed at the right of the selection steps
when you are specifying alternate thicknesses.

Shell uses Selection Intent methods to gather collections of faces.

6-18

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Modeling Features, Part 1

Activity - Using Shell


You are going to create a shell with a thickness of 1.0 millimeter, and leave
the bottom face of the part open.
Step 1:

Create a shell feature


Open the shell part and make sure the modeling application
is running.

Choose the Shell icon

or InsertOffset/ScaleShell.

Make sure Enable Preview is on.

Enter a Thickness of 1.0.


With the Remove Faces selection step active, select the bottom
face of the part.

Choose the Show Results icon

(on the dialog).

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

6-19

Modeling Features, Part 1

The Show Results icon


displays the results of
creating the feature without actually creating it, When
chosen, the icon changes to Undo Result.
Choose OK.

Step 2:

Close all parts.

6-20

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Modeling Features, Part 1

Draft
The Taper function has been renamed to Draft and the dialog and user
interface have changed. The new Draft allows you to change faces so that they
are angled relative to a certain draw direction. The drafted faces allow the
part or pattern, and its mold or die, to be easily separated.

The Draft function is especially useful when developing molded/forged parts,


as well as dies and cast parts because it lets you:

specify the selection intent to select faces or edges that are required for
the draft

have multiple draft angles in one draft feature

preview the operation on the screen before it accepts the input

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

6-21

Modeling Features, Part 1

Draft Dialog
There are four different draft types. Though the basic procedure is the same
for creating each draft type, the selection steps vary.
You need to specify at least the following inputs for the draft operation:

Draw direction

Stationary objects

Faces to draft

Draft angle

6-22

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Modeling Features, Part 1

Type
Draft from Stationary Plane lets you specify that a selected set of
edges be stationary, and that the faces
that own these edges be drafted at
specified angles.

Selection Steps

Vector options
Stationary Plane
Faces to Draft

Draft from Stationary Edges


- lets you specify that a selected set of
edges be stationary, and that the faces
that own these edges be drafted at
specified angles.

Vector options

Stationary Edges

Variable Angle Point

Draft Tangent to Faces creates a draft while maintaining the


tangency between the faces you select.

Vector options
Tangent Faces to Draft

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

6-23

Modeling Features, Part 1

Draft to Parting Edges - creates


drafted faces based on a selected set
of parting edges, a specified angle and
a stationary plane. The stationary
plane determines the cross section that
is maintained throughout the draft
operation. This draft type creates
ledge faces perpendicular to the
reference direction and the edge.

Vector options
Stationary Plane
Parting Edges

6-24

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Modeling Features, Part 1

Activity - Creating Drafts


In this activity, you will create drafts from a stationary plane, from stationary
edges and tangent to faces.
Step 1:

Open the draft part and start the Modeling application.

You want to draft the two holes on the end of the part.
Step 2:

Specify the Draft Type and Draw direction


Choose the Draft icon

or choose InsertDetail

FeatureDraft.

Draft From Stationary Plane


is the default type; it lets you
select the faces to draft and a plane to define the draft start.
The Cue prompts for a draw direction. The draw direction is the
reference vector from which the draft angle will be measured from.
For cast and molded parts, this will usually be parallel to the
ejection direction.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

6-25

Modeling Features, Part 1

Accept the default draw direction of the positive ZC direction


by clicking MB2.

Step 3:

Specify the Stationary Plane


The two holes are thru a normal planar face. You now need to
define where the draft should start.
Verify that the Stationary Plane

selection step is active.

Select the bottom face as shown:

In the dialog, an expression has been created for the default draft
angle of 10 degrees. You need a smaller draft angle for the two
holes.
Key in 5 in the Set1 A field and press Enter.
6-26

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Modeling Features, Part 1

Step 4:

Specify the faces to draft


Verify that the Faces to Draft

selection step is active.

Verify that the Enable Preview option is ON.


Select the cylindrical face of both holes.

A preview of the draft is shown as the faces are selected. You can
now see that the draft will make the hole larger, or reduce mass.
You actually want the hole to get smaller.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

6-27

Modeling Features, Part 1

Step 5:

Change the Draw Direction


Since you want the hole to get smaller, we need to change the
draw direction.
Choose the Reverse Direction icon

The draft preview now shows that the hole will get smaller.

You can now see that the holes diameter at the bottom face does
not change size when the draft is added. This is because the
bottom face was selected as the Stationary Plane to draft from.

The features size remains constant thru the stationary plane.


Choose Apply to create the draft.
Step 6:

Draft both sides of the center rib; you want the top of the rib to
remain constant so you will use Draft from Stationary Edges
Choose the Draft From Stationary Edges

6-28

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

type.

mt10026_g NX 4

Modeling Features, Part 1

Accept the default direction of the positive ZC direction by


clicking MB2.

Step 7:

Select the stationary edges.


Verify that the Stationary Edges selection step

is active.

Select both long edges on top of the rib.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

6-29

Modeling Features, Part 1

The draft preview shows mass being added to the rib.

Choose Apply to complete the draft.


Replace the view using MB3Orient ViewTop.
You can now see that the top of the rib width remained constant.

Replace the view using MB3Orient ViewIsometric.

6-30

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Modeling Features, Part 1

Step 8:

The walls adjacent to the cylindrical pivot pad need draft. You
need to add draft that is tangent to the cylindrical face of the pivot
pad. The Draft Tangent To Faces type can be used in this case.

Choose the Draft Tangent To Faces

type.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

6-31

Modeling Features, Part 1

Step 9:

Specify the faces to draft.


Accept the draw direction by clicking MB2.

Verify that the Tangent Faces to Draft selection step


active.

is

Change to Single Face on the Selection Intent toolbar if


necessary.
Select the cylindrical face and the three planar faces tangent to
the cylindrical face as shown:

A preview of the draft is shown.

6-32

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Modeling Features, Part 1

Step 10: Specify the Draft Angle.


Key in 5 in the Set1 A field and press Enter.
Choose OK.
The three planar faces are drafted while maintaining the tangency
to the cylindrical face.

Replace the view using MB3Orient ViewFront.

Close all parts.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

6-33

Modeling Features, Part 1

Edge Blend
The Edge Blend function is accessed by choosing the Edge Blend icon or
choose InsertDetail FeatureEdge Blend.

You are now able to:


Enter information using the dynamic input fields as well as the dialog.

6-34

Blend multiple edge chains having different constant radii within one
feature (and within a single body). Chaining will not be allowed to proceed
onto invalid edges.

Automatically select all of the edges comprising a vertex by selecting


the vertex.

For blends, a connected edge can occur only at a vertex that has at least
one other edge thus comprising a branch condition, which terminates
the chain.

Select the two face groups for Face Blends by the selection of the edge
chain that connects them. Although this is a face blend capability, it will
be implemented within the Edge Blend enhancements. After using the
edge to select face groups for face blending, you will be able to select
additional faces for each group.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Modeling Features, Part 1

Specify a radius value for any vertex in an edge chain and for any point on
the edge chain. When needed, you will be able to create points on the edge
chain while working within the fillet operation.
Create stop blends, which are short of a designated vertex. You will be able
to create this on an individual edge chain and individual end vertex basis.

Create a blend that stops at a specified distance from the vertex. When
stop short is applied, an end cap will be created.

Smooth Edge Rollover You are now able to allow fillet surfaces to cross
smooth tangent edges onto adjacent rollover surfaces when the geometry
warrants it.

Twist Patches For areas where the rolling ball analogy breaks down
(e.g., self-intersections, etc.), you can allow for a twist patch result (as that
of Ideas). A default setting (on) of this option creates these twist patches.

Optionally turn the automatic preview off. The preview on-demand will
still be available if automatic preview has been turned off.

The recipe for construction of smart points used to locate Variable


Radius points is now remembered.

There is also a new icon on the dialog for displaying the results of the
completed blend (Show Results) without actually creating the feature.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

6-35

Modeling Features, Part 1

Activity - Variable Radius Edge Blend


In this activity, you will create a 5.0 millimeter radius blend at each end of
the large block, and a 25.0 millimeter blend at both sides of the circular disc
on the smaller body. You will also designate the location of the larger radii of
the blend to follow the location of the circular disc.

You first want to create smart points at the faces of both circular faces of the
boss on the small body. These will be used to control the location of two of the
variable radius blend points on the lower edge of the other body.
Step 1:

Open the edge_blend part and make sure the modeling application
is running.

There is an obvious intersection between these two solid bodies.


You want to create an Edge Blend on the larger block, so it always
clears the circular disc on the smaller body.

6-36

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Modeling Features, Part 1

Step 2:

Create two associative points at the faces of both circular faces


of the boss on the small body. These will be used to control the
location of two of the variable radius blend points on the lower
edge of the other body.
Choose the Point icon
or choose
InsertDatum/PointPoint, and make sure
Associative Point is the active icon.
Make sure that only End Point
Point toolbar.

is active on the Snap

Select the end of the edge that ends at the near side of the
circular boss (on the small body).

6
Rotate the view and create another associative point on the
other side of the boss.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

6-37

Modeling Features, Part 1

Step 3:

Start edge blend construction.


Restore the view.

Choose the Edge Blend icon


on the Feature Operation
toolbar or use InsertDetail FeatureEdge Blend.
Enter a 5.0 for the Set1 R, and Enter.
Select the near lower long edge of the large block.

Choose the Show Result icon

on the dialog.

This displays the completed edge blend, without actually


creating the feature. You can then use OK, Apply, or
Cancel as they become available.
Choose the Undo Result icon.
Step 4:

Create the first variable radius point.


Choose the Variable Radius icon

6-38

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

on the dialog.

mt10026_g NX 4

Modeling Features, Part 1

With only the End Point icon


active (on the Snap Point
toolbar), select the right end of the long edge being blended.

Enter a radius of 5.0, and press Enter


Step 5:

Create the second variable radius point.


Choose the Variable Radius icon

on the dialog.

With only the End Point icon


active (on the Snap Point
toolbar), select the left end of the long edge being blended.

Enter a radius of 5.0, and press Enter


Step 6:

Create the third variable radius point.


Choose the Variable Radius icon

on the dialog.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

6-39

Modeling Features, Part 1

With only the Existing Point icon


(on the Snap Point
toolbar) active, select one of the two Associative Points you
created at the side of the boss on the smaller body.

Enter a radius of 25.0, and press Enter


Step 7:

Create the fourth variable radius point.


With only the Existing Point icon
(on the Snap Point
toolbar) active, select the other Associative Point you created at
the side of the boss on the smaller body.

6
Enter a radius of 25.0, and press Enter
Choose OK on the dialog.

6-40

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Modeling Features, Part 1

Restore the view.

Step 8:

Test associativity by changing the orientation of the circular boss


to see the effect on the Edge Blend just created.
The location and orientation of the boss is controlled by the datum
plane, which in turn is controlled by points on three edges of the
smaller block.
Double-click MB1 on the Datum Plane.
Select the block handle on the right edge of the small block.

Make sure Point on Curve

is the only active icon on the

Snap Point toolbar. and slide the handle to the right (or left).

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

6-41

Modeling Features, Part 1

Choose OK on the dialog.

Step 9:

Close all parts.

6-42

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Modeling Features, Part 1

Chamfer
The Chamfer function is accessed by choosing the Chamfer icon or choose
InsertDetail FeatureChamfer.

Symmetric Offsets is the same as the


old Single Offset.
Asymmetric Offsets is the same as the
old Double Offset.
Offset and Angle is the same as the old
Offset Angle.

Offset Method replaces the two sets of chamfer methods: the three simple
methods and the two Freeform methods.

Offset Edges Along Faces accomplishes the same thing as the old simple
chamfer methods. The offset values are applied along the faces that
intersect at the edge being chamfered.

Offset Faces and Trim does the same thing as the old Freeform methods.
With this option, the chamfer is calculated by offsetting the faces (that
intersect at the edge being chamfered) to determine the limit of the
chamfer faces.

Chamfer All Instances will apply the specified chamfer to all instances of the
selected edges (if they belong to instanced features).
Enable Preview allows the chamfer to be displayed prior to creation.
The Show Results icon
displays the results of creating the feature
without actually creating it, When chosen, the icon changes to Undo Result.
Reverse Offsets
reverses the faces the values of the offset are applied
to. This is only available for Asymmetric Offsets and Offset and Angle.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

6-43

Modeling Features, Part 1

Activity - Creating Chamfers


In this activity you will create a Symmetric Chamfer of 0.5 mm on the upper
edges of the large hole in the center of the part. You will next create a chamfer
on the upper outer edge of the part, and change to type and size of the chamfer.
Step 1:
Create the first chamfer.
Open the chamfer part and make sure the modeling application
is running.

Choose the Chamfer icon


on the Feature Operation
toolbar or use InsertDetail FeatureChamfer.
Make sure Offset Edges Along Faces and Enable Preview
are both on.

Make sure the Symmetric Offsets icon

is active.

Select the top edge of the large circular hole in the part.

6
You can drag the Offset handle, or enter a value in the field.

6-44

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Modeling Features, Part 1

Enter a value of 0.75 in the Offset field, and choose the


MB3Apply.

Step 2:

Create a second chamfer.


With Selection Intent set to Tangent Curves, select any outer
edge of the upper surface of the part.

Enter an Offset value of 1.2 (or drag the handle so it is set


to 1.2).

Choose the OK icon.

Step 3:

Edit the chamfer to change its type.


Double-click on the chamfer you just created.

Choose the Offset and Angle icon.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

6-45

Modeling Features, Part 1

Change the Angle to 60.0 degrees.

If the angle is measured off the wrong face, choose the Reverse
Offsets icon
Choose OK.

Step 4:

Close the part.

6-46

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Modeling Features, Part 1

Datum CSYS
The Datum CSYS function has been enhanced to provide an improved
appearance, a scale factor and, to offset CSYS objects, a rotate-translate
capability.
The representation of a Datum CSYS has changed.

The Datum CSYS user interface and dialog is enhanced for NX 4.

The Datum CSYS creation is enhanced with Apply, so that you can create
many features in one use of the dialog.
You can control the Display Scale Factor of the Datum CSYS symbol in the
view. This can be done at the time of creation or editing. The default is set to
1.0. The size is relative to the size of the Work Coordinate System.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

6-47

Modeling Features, Part 1

Members of a Datum Coordinate System include datum planes, datum axes,


and a point.

When creating an offset Datum CSYS, you can select the entire Datum CSYS
by selecting the members of the Datum CSYS. Also, offset Datum CSYS
objects can be translated and rotated in either order. The offset Datum CSYS
icon was moved to the right most icon to provide easier access.

6-48

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Modeling Features, Part 1

Datum Planes
Datum Plane has been expanded to include more functionality.
Datum Plane construction in inferred mode is similar to methods used in NX
2. However, some methods have been enhanced.
For example, the center plane has been renamed to bisector plane, and it is
still created by selecting any pair of planar faces, planes, or datum planes;
and, an offset datum plane is still created by selecting the planar face. In NX
4, multiple offsets are also supported.

1. As you select each Type icon type


on the Plane dialog...
2. ...the lower portion of the dialog
changes as needed to allow you to
make the correct specifications for
the plane.

Cycle Solution lets you cycle


through all possible solutions for the
selected objects.
Reverse Direction lets you reverse the direction vector. This is
available in the middle of the dialog, for some methods.
Reverse Normal lets you change the direction of the plane normal.
Double-clicking on the plane normal handle will do the same thing.
The Associative toggle on the Plane dialog lets you create associative
(toggled on) or non-associative planes (toggled off).
Datum Plane Types
Inferred. The constraints are inferred by the objects selected.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

6-49

Modeling Features, Part 1

Point and Direction creates a datum plane that is defined by a point to


locate, and a vector to orient its normal.
Plane on Curve creates a datum plane tangent to, normal or binormal
to a point on a curve. You can drag the location handle for the point along
the curve or edge. You can also use this method to create a datum plane
coincident with a point on curve, with its direction defined by a second object.
At Distance creates a datum plane that is parallel to a planar face or a
another datum plane at a distance you specify. Once you select the planar
face or datum plane, you can specify its offset, parallel distance by dragging
the offset handle, or entering an offset value in the dynamic input box or
dialog Offset field. From the dialog, you can also enter the number of copies
of the new plane you want to create in the Number of Planes field. Each
datum plane is successively created and spaced evenly from one another
using the same offset value.
At Angle creates a datum plane using a specified angle in relation to
selected planar geometry. You first select a planar face, plane, or datum
plane. Then you select a parallel linear curve or datum axis. You can specify
the angle by either dragging the angle handle or by entering an angle value
in degrees in the Angle field of the dialog or dynamic input box.

Bisector Plane create a datum mid-plane using the bisected angle


between two selected planar faces or datum planes. Cycle Solution will cycle
between the bisector plane and one normal to the bisector plane.
Curves and Points creates a datum plane by first specifying a point,
and then a line, datum axis, curve, or edge. The new datum plane passes
through both objects.
Two Lines creates a datum plane by selecting two existing lines. The
resulting plane contains the first line and is parallel to the second. If the two
lines are coplanar, then the plane will include both lines.
Tangent to Face At Point, Line or Face creates a datum plane tangent
to a selected cylindrical face and is contains a selected point, line or face.

6-50

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Modeling Features, Part 1

Plane of Object creates a datum plane based on the plane of an existing


curve, edge, face, datum, or plane that you select. The curve, edge, or face can
be planar or non-planar. If you select a conical face, the datum plane
is created on the axis of the conic.
Plane Display and Visual Sizes
Planes and Datum Planes now display as translucent objects in both and
shaded and dynamic wireframe modes.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

6-51

Modeling Features, Part 1

Activity - New Datum Plane Enhancements


Step 1:

Create the initial datum plane.


Open the datum_plane part and make sure the modeling
application is running.

Choose the Datum Plane icon


or
InsertDatum/PointDatum Plane.
Using any type that works, select the two cylindrical faces.

Choose the Cycle Solution icon


through all four solutions.
Step 2:

on the dialog to cycle

Test datum plane mouse actions.


Using MB1, drag any of the edge handles on the temporary
datum plane to change its displayed size.

6-52

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Modeling Features, Part 1

With the cursor over one of the datum plane edge handles,
choose MB3Symmetric.
Again, using MB1, drag any of the edge handles on the
temporary datum plane to change its displayed size. Notice
how the size changes now.
With the cursor over one of the datum plane edge handles,
choose MB3Reset Plane Size.
Use the Cycle Solutions icon to make sure the datum plane is
in front of both cylindrical faces.
Choose OK.

Create more datum planes using some of the other types on the
datum plane dialog to experiment with the new datum plane
functionality.
Step 3:

Close all parts when you are done.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

6-53

Modeling Features, Part 1

Summary
In this lesson you learned about the enhancements to the following modeling
features:

Extrude

Revolve

Shell

Draft

Edge Blend

Chamfer

Datum CSYS

Datum Plane

6-54

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Lesson

7 Modeling Features, Part 2


Purpose
This lesson will familiarize you with what is new in the features functionality
of NX 4 Modeling application.
Objectives
In this lesson, you will learn about the following enhancements:

Body Taper

Trim Body

Spherical Corner

Dart

User Defined Feature

Replace Feature

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

7-1

Modeling Features, Part 2

Body Taper

There are several enhancements:

Selection Intent has been added for collecting edges and faces.

After selecting the parting object and the draw direction, the process will
automatically progress to the next selection step.

You can add taper to multiple bodies in the same feature. They will all
use the same parting object, draw direction, and draw angle.

The edit dialog will be the same as the creation dialog.

In previous versions Body Taper performed a merge faces operation when


the feature was applied. This can cause previously divided faces to be
merged back to their pre-divide state. In NX 4 that no longer happens
faces are not merged. Body taper features in existing NX files will
continue to merge on update. Newly added features will not merge.

7-2

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Modeling Features, Part 2

Activity - Creating a Multi-body Taper


In this activity you will create a multi-body taper, then edit its parting planes.
Step 1:

Start the Body Taper.


Open the part body_taper and start the Modeling application.

You are going to create a single Body Taper feature for both solids,
and then edit it several ways.
Choose the Body Taper icon
FeatureBody Taper.

or InsertDetail

Select the datum plane as the Parting object.


Notice that the selection step automatically advanced as soon as
you selected the datum plane.
Use MB2 to accept the Draw Direction.
Step 2:

Create the body taper.


For the Loop Above Parting Line, make sure Selection Intent is
set to Tangent Curves, and select any of the edges on the top
surface of the solid on the left.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

7-3

Modeling Features, Part 2

Select the top edge of the cylinder.

Use MB2 to advance to the Loop Below Parting selection step.


Using Tangent Curves, select all the edges on the bottom of the
two solid bodies.

Enter 15 degrees for the Draw Angle, and turn on Match taper.

Choose OK on the dialog twice.

7-4

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Modeling Features, Part 2

Step 3:

Edit the top loop.


You are now going to change the curves selected for the Loop Above
Parting, by removing the near linear edge.
With Selection set to Feature, double-click on the Taper feature
you just created.
Choose the Loop Above Parting selection step icon.

Shift-select the loop of edges on top of the solid on the left, to


deselect it.

7
Change Selection Intent to Single Curve.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

7-5

Modeling Features, Part 2

Select the two circular edges and the rear linear edge on the
top of the solid on the left.

Choose OK on the dialog until the part updates.

Step 4:

Change the parting.


Undo the edit you just made.

7
Now you are going to replace the parting datum plane with
another.
With Selection set to Feature, double-click on the Taper feature.

7-6

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Modeling Features, Part 2

Make Layer 63 Selectable.

With the Parting selection step active, shift-select the currently


used datum plane to deselect it.
Select the datum plane above the one you just deselected.
Choose OK on the dialog until the part updates.

Step 5:

Close all parts.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

7-7

Modeling Features, Part 2

Trim Body
The user interface and dialogs have changed for the Trim Body function. A
Preview switch has been added to better understand the results prior to
completing the feature.

The Selection Steps:


Target allows selection of the bodies to be trimmed.
The second selection step is switch-able between two icons: one is for
selection of a tool, the other to define a plane.
Tool
Plane
The third selection step is only active if the second is set to Plane. It then
allows you to define the plane used for trimming.

7-8

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Modeling Features, Part 2

Activity - Examining the New Trim Interface


Step 1:

Create the first trim operation.


Open the trim_body part and start the Modeling application.

Make Layer 81 Selectable.

You want to trim off the top of the part, so give it some shape.
Choose the Trim Body icon or InsertTrimTrim Body.
Make sure Enable Preview is on.

Select the solid body as the Target.


Use MB2 to advance to the next selection step.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

7-9

Modeling Features, Part 2

Make sure the second selection step is set to Tool, and select
the surface.
The trim direction is displayed (by the arrow), and the results are
previewed as shaded

Choose the Reverse Direction icon on the dialog, or double-click


on the arrow in the graphics window.

With the preview as shown above, choose OK on the dialog.


Make Layer 81 Invisible.

Step 2:

Make the second trim.


Now you will use the plane option to trim the part to a plane
defined by two of the small holes.
Choose the Trim Body icon or InsertTrimTrim Body.
Make sure Enable Preview is on.
Select the solid body as the Target.
Use MB2 to advance to the next selection step.
Make sure the second selection step is set to Plane.

7-10

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Modeling Features, Part 2

With the third selection step set to Inferred Plane, select three
arc centers (as shown below) to define the trimming plane.

Make sure the rearmost portion of the part is the portioned to


be retained, and choose OK on the dialog.

Step 3:

Close all parts.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

7-11

Modeling Features, Part 2

Dart
The Dart feature lets you add a dart feature along the intersection curve of
two sets of faces. It is primarily used for creating strengthening "darts" in
sheet metal parts. It can be used for both sheet and solid bodies.

1) First Face Set


2) Intersection Curve
3) Second Face Set
4) Dart Feature

The orientation of the dart is on a plane that is perpendicular to the


intersection curve of the two sets of faces, but you can define the orientation
yourself.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

7-17

Modeling Features, Part 2

The Dart Dialog

1) Selection Steps
2) Method

3) Dimensional Parameters

7-18

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Modeling Features, Part 2

Selection Steps

First Set Lets you select the faces for the first set. You can select one or
more faces for the face set.
Second Set Lets you select the faces for the second set. You can select
one or more faces for the face set.
Location Curve This curve represents the intersection of the surfaces
involved in the Dart procedure. The Dart feature will be located using this
curve.
Location Plane Lets you optionally specify the position of the dart
feature relative to a plane or datum plane.
Orientation Plane Lets you optionally select a plane for the orientation
of the dart feature.
Filter Available for Location Plane and Orientation Plane.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

7-19

Modeling Features, Part 2

Method

The Method refers to how you define the location of the dart along the
intersection curve. You have two options:
Along Curve allows you to dynamically define a base point for the dart
anywhere on the intersection curve. The graphics display, face normal vector
and the value in the Arclength field all update as you drag the point along
the curve

Arclength/%Arclength: Toggle Arclength in units of model; %Arclength


determines percentage of location curve.
Position allows you to position the dart based on a datum plane or plane. The
location of the dart will be where the plane intersects the Location curve base
If you select the Position method and have not selected a plane, a WCS
or Absolute menu displays.

7
If you select the Position method and use the Location Plane selection step
to select a plane an offset menu displays, to allow you to define an offset
value from the plane selected.

7-20

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Modeling Features, Part 2

Dimension Parameters

Parameter Entry Options


Note that when specifying either Method or Dimension parameters, you can
access
the parameter entry options for more robust definition of the dart
parameters.

Preview
This option generates a preview of the dart whenever enough parameters
have been specified to create a possible dart.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

7-21

Modeling Features, Part 2

Activity Creating a Dart Feature


You need to create three strengthening "darts" at the intersection
of the two faces of an unparameterized sewn sheet body. There are
parametric sizing relationships that must be maintained in each of
these darts.

Step 1:

Open the cdt_dart part and start the Modeling application.

Step 2:

Define the faces for the dart.

Choose InsertDesign FeatureDart or choose the Dart icon


on the Form Feature toolbar.
Make sure Method is set to Along Curve.
Make sure Preview is set to on.
Select the upper face as the first face, and use MB2 to finish
the selection.

7-22

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Modeling Features, Part 2

Select the lower face as the second face.

The default arclength is 50 percent of the inferred intersection


curve between the two faces. You could adjust this by using the
slider or entering a different percentage, or you could choose
a explicit arclength value, but you will leave the first dart in
its default positioning.
Step 3:

Change the sizing parameters of the dart.


Choose the Parameter Entry Options arrow
Angle entry field.

beside the

Choose Measure from the option list.


Choose the By Objects icon

on the icon options bar.

Select the two faces, the OK


to accept the angle.
The angle measurement is read into the Angle field.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

7-23

Modeling Features, Part 2

Apply the dialog.

Step 4:

Create the second dart


Select the same faces again as the first and second set of faces.
After finishing the selection of the second set of faces, the cue
line prompts you to "Specify location curve". Since there are
now two curves at the intersection of the selected faces, the
system needs to know which one you want to use.
Select the far intersection edge.

7
Choose the Parameter Entry Options arrow
Angle entry field.

beside the

Choose Formula from the option list.


In the Formula entry field, enter /2 to the value (106.743823/2),
then choose the Accept Edit checkmark.
OK the Expressions dialog.
7-24

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Modeling Features, Part 2

Rotate the display to better see your work.


Step 5:

Orient the location plane.


Make layer 10 Selectable
Choose the Orientation Plane icon.
Set the Filter to Datum Plane
Select the left datum plane.

The darts location plane is oriented to the angle of the datum


plane.
Choose Apply to generate the dart.

7
Step 6:

Repeat the same process to generate the third dart at 50%


arclength on the right side, using the same Angle value and using
the right datum plane for orientation.
NX2NX4 CAD Transition

7-25

Modeling Features, Part 2

Step 7:

Make layer 10 Invisible then rotate the part to check out the darts.

Note the dart cavities on the underside of the part.


Step 8:

Close the part.

7-26

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Modeling Features, Part 2

Replace Features
The Replace Feature function has the following improvements:

Replace Feature lets you re-specify the selection intent of downstream


features.

You can reorient the input direction of the downstream feature.

You can now replace curve features. The basic purpose of Replace Feature
is to re-parent a feature due to a design change.
You can replace a feature in the Part Navigator by clicking MB3Replace
over the Feature. You can replace features using EditFeatureReplace.
The Replace Features Dialog
The Replace Feature dialog has been modified to include four list boxes:

1. Eligible Features to
Replace
2. Features to Replace
3. Dependent Features
4. Replacement Features

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

7-37

Modeling Features, Part 2

Activity - Replacing Features


Your original model looks like this.

Your finished model will look like this.

Step 1:

Set up the model.


Choose FileOptionsLoad Options and turn off the Use
Partial Loading option and make sure the Load Method is set

to From Directory.
Open the work_new part, and make sure the modeling
application is running.

Start the Assemblies application.


7-38

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Modeling Features, Part 2

Using the Assembly Navigator, choose new_top and choose


MB3Make Work Part.
Step 2:

Start to replace features.


Choose the Replace Feature icon

or choose

EditFeatureReplace.
Step 3:

Select features to replace.


With the Original Features
selection step active,
double-click on Linked Body (1) to add it to the Features to
Replace column.
You could select the feature in the list and choose the Add Feature
icon.
Double-click on Linked Curve (0) to add it to the Features to
Replace column.
Now, two features are listed in Features to Replace, and two
dependent features are listed.

7
Step 4:

Select replacement features.


Click MB2 to advance to the Replacement Features step, or
choose the Replacement Features icon

on the dialog.

The dialog lists different eligible replacement features.


Double-click on both the Linked Curve (2) and Linked Body (3)
to add it to the Replacement Features list box.
-

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

7-39

Modeling Features, Part 2

Toggle off the Retain Replacement Features and Retain


Original Features, if needed.
Step 5:

Use the parent map to specify a new profile.


Choose the Parent Map icon

or click MB2.

The profile with the section for the law extension is highlighted in
the view. You will re-specify this profile using another curve.
Select the long curve near the right end, so that the direction is
correct other wise flip.

7
A direction vector displays. This vector should align approximately
with the other vector.

7-40

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Modeling Features, Part 2

Step 6:

Specify the first set of tangent faces.


Choose ()_First set of tangent faces for Law Extension(4)
on the dialog.

The first set of tangent faces for the law extension are highlighted
in the view.

You will specify the replacement face.


In the view, select any of the faces on the replacement feature.
The system will select all three.

Step 7:

Reverse the direction vector.


Notice a direction vector displays, but it points in a direction
opposite from the other direction arrow. The Reversion Direction
icon

lets you change the direction of the vector.


NX2NX4 CAD Transition

7-41

Modeling Features, Part 2

Choose the Reverse Direction icon.


Now, the first two constraints are
satisfied, and both direction vectors point
downward.

Choose ()_Faces for the first wall for Face Blend(5) on the
dialog.
Click MB2 to accept the current face which is preselected.
Choose OK on the dialog.

7
Now the long sheet replaces the smaller curved sheet.
Step 8:

7-42

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

Close all parts.

mt10026_g NX 4

Modeling Features, Part 2

Summary
In this lesson you learned about the enhancements to the following modeling
features:

Body Taper

Trim Body

Dart

Replace Feature

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

7-43

Lesson

8 Modeling Free Form


Features, Part 1
Purpose
This lesson will familiarize you with what is new in free form functionality in
NX 4 Modeling application.
Objectives
After completing this lesson you will be able to:

Use B-Spline Curve Smoothing.

Use Surface Pole Smoothing.

Use Surface Extend and Trim.

Use Grid and Section Analysis.

Create 3D Splines with Continuity Constraints

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

8-1

Modeling Free Form Features, Part 1

B-Spline Curve Smoothing


Smooth Spline is available on the Edit Curve toolbar (or
EditCurveSmooth Spline) and is a new spline function that allows for
control of the start and end shape of a spline. It also allows you to minimize
either the curvature magnitude or the curvature deviation.
You can also choose to modify less than the entire length of the spline.
Smooth Spline Dialog
The icons at the top of the dialog allow you to control
the type of smoothing:
Curvature minimizes the curvature magnitude.
Curvature Variation minimizes the curvature
variation.
Partial allows you to smooth less than the full
length of the spline, by dragging the start and/or end
of the area you wish to smooth.
The Boundary Constraint area of the dialog allows
you to maintain the shape at the start and/or end of
the spline. The available options are G0, G1, G2 and
G3.
Smoothing Factor lets you tell the system the number
of times to carry out the smoothing operation each
time Apply is chosen.
Modification Percentage lets you tell the system that
percentage of overall smoothing that is to be applied
to the selected spline.

8-2

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Modeling Free Form Features, Part 1

Activity Smoothing a Spline


In this activity, you will experiment with smoothing the curvature
of a spline.
Step 1:

Open the cdt_spline_smoothing part and start the Modeling


application.

This spline might have been created from a scanned clay model.
It obviously needs to be smoothed before it can be used to create
a slab surface.
Step 2:

Designate the parameters to smooth the spline.


Choose the Smooth Spline icon.
on the Edit Curve
toolbar or choose EditCurveSmooth Spline.
Select the spline.
OK the warning message that Defining Data and Dimensions
will be deleted.
The arrow at the end of the spline indicates the start end of
the spline.
Set the Start Boundary Constraint to G2, and leave the End
Boundary Constraint set to G0.
Choose the Curvature Smoothing Type.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

8-3

Modeling Free Form Features, Part 1

Set the Smoothing Factor to 50.

The arrow with the value displayed is indicating the maximum


deviation from the original curve.
With the Modification Percentage set to 100, choose Apply 6
times.

Notice that each time you Apply, that the smoothing factors
designated are applied to the spline.
Cancel the dialog.
Step 3:

8-4

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

Close the part.

mt10026_g NX 4

Modeling Free Form Features, Part 1

Surface Pole Smoothing


Pole Smoothing is available on the Free Form Shape toolbar (or
EditSurfacePole Smoothing) and is a new function that allows you to
smooth out pole locations automatically. The system will calculate a location
of all or selected poles in relation to surrounding conditions.

Both the sliders are automatically in micro-positioning mode. Use the


CTRL key to disengage it.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

8-5

Modeling Free Form Features, Part 1

Pole Smoothing Dialog

None will allow the system to decide how best to move the poles.
X, Y and Z Direction will move the poles in the selected direction (parallel
to the corresponding direction of the WCS axis).
Normal will move the poles normal to the surface being edited.
Arbitrary Direction will access the Vector Constructor dialog for you to
specify the direction you want to move the poles.
Move Selected Poles Only allows you to select which poles to be moved.
If you do not use this, all the poles will be available to be moved.
The Boundary Constraints section of the dialog allows you to control the four
edges of the surface in five different ways.

None allows the edge to move freely.


G0 constrains the edge so the location does not change.
G1 constrains the edge so the tangency does not change.
G2 constrains the edge so the curvature does not change.
G3 constrains the edge so the curvature acceleration does not change.
The two sliders at the bottom of the dialog allow you to control the amount of
pole movement.
8-6

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Modeling Free Form Features, Part 1

Smoothing Factor controls the number of successive smoothing steps that


are performed in one OK or Apply application. A value of 1 smooths only
once when OK or Apply is chosen. A value of 100 smooths 100 times when
Apply or OK is chosen
Modification Percentage controls the percentage of smoothing that is applied
to the surface or selected poles. Zero percent results in no change; 100%
results in the maximum amount of smoothing.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

8-7

Modeling Free Form Features, Part 1

Activity Using Pole Smoothing


In this activity, you will smooth a surface through the manipulation
of its defining poles and experiment with the continuity controls
during the smoothing process.
Step 1:

Open the cdt_pole_smoothing part and start the Modeling


application.

Step 2:

Rotate the part and examine it visually.


There are some obvious irregularities in the smoothness of this
surface.

Step 3:

Assess the pole irregularities.


Choose the Pole Smoothing icon
(on the Free Form
Shape toolbar), or choose EditSurfacePole Smoothing.
The Pole Smoothing dialog displays.
Select the surface. The poles and the U and V directions are
temporarily displayed.

8
It is rather obvious that only one pole needs to be moved.
8-8

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Modeling Free Form Features, Part 1

Leave the Pole Movement Direction set to None.


Step 4:

Set the boundary constraints.


Make sure all four Boundary Constraints are set to G0.
The only poles available for selection for this are those that can
be moved without breaking the boundary constraint conditions
set on the dialog.
In this case (with all four constraints set to G0), all but the outer
poles can move.

Step 5:

Identify the poles to be moved.


Choose the Move Selected Poles Only icon.
The poles available to be selected are highlighted with spheres.
Select the pole that is the furthest from the surface.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

8-9

Modeling Free Form Features, Part 1

Step 6:

Specify the Smoothing Factor and Modification Percentage


Leave Smoothing Factor at 1, and leave Modification
Percentage at 100.
Choose the Preview icon on the dialog.
The settings on the dialog are applied.

Step 7:

Change the Smoothing Factor


Slide the Smoothing Factor to 100.

OK the dialog.

Examine the part visually.


8-10

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Modeling Free Form Features, Part 1

Do NOT close the part.


Step 8:

Smooth the poles of another surface.


Make layer 82 the Work Layer, and make layer 81Invisible.
Replace the view with the view named TRI_2

Examine the part visually, then Restore the view.


Choose the Pole Smoothing icon
(on the Free Form
Shape toolbar), or choose EditSurfacePole Smoothing.
You need to smooth the surface, and Initially you want to
maintain the locations of all four edges.
Step 9:

Select the poles to move.


Select the surface.
Set all Boundary Constraints to G0.
Choose the Move Selected Poles Only icon on the dialog.
Select the two poles in the middle of the surface.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

8-11

Modeling Free Form Features, Part 1

Step 10: Smooth the surface.


Set the Smoothing Factor to 100, and leave Modification
Percentage at 100.
Choose the Preview icon on the dialog.

OK the dialog.

8-12

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Modeling Free Form Features, Part 1

Step 11:

Change the smoothing to smooth out the surface in the U


direction, and ignore the location of the edges at V-Min and V-Max.
Choose the Pole Smoothing icon.

Select the surface.

Set the V-Min and V-Max Boundary Constraints to None.


Set the Smoothing Factor to 100.
Apply the dialog four times.
Notice that each time you Apply, that the smoothing factors
designated are applied to the surface.
Cancel the dialog.

Step 12: Close the part.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

8-13

Modeling Free Form Features, Part 1

Surface Trim and Extend


Trim and Extend is a new function available on the Surface toolbar (or
InsertTrimTrim and Extend), that allows easy trimming and
extending of bodies, by a specified distance, or to other faces.

1) Target Body
2) Trimming Tool

This operation creates a


TRIM_AND_EXTEND feature

8-14

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Modeling Free Form Features, Part 1

The Trim and Extend Dialog

Limit
The Limit options let you specify the kind of Trim and Extend operation.
Distance Extends one or more edges by a distance value that you enter in
the data entry field. No trimming occurs with the Distance option.

Planar Extend Using Distance

8
3D Extend Using Distance

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

8-15

Modeling Free Form Features, Part 1

Percentage Extends one or more edges by a percentage of the arclength of


the selected tool edges. No trimming occurs with the Percentage option. Until
Selected - Trims a target using a tool. A vector is displayed indicating the
direction affected by the Region option.

If you use the Make Corner option with Until Selected, both the target and
the tool are modified.

If the Make Corner option is not selected then only the target is modified.
Extend Method
This option lets you specify the continuity of an extend operation.

8
Natural Tangent - The extension is
created in a linear direction (1).
Natural Curvature - The extension of
the sheet is curvature continuous (2).

Mirrored - The extension of the sheet reflects or "mirrors" the shape of the
original surface, where possible.
8-16

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Modeling Free Form Features, Part 1

Region
This option lets you specify to retain or discard material in trim operations
when Limits are set to Until Selected.
Keep - When you select a tool sheet or edges a vector displays on the target
or the tool. When the vector is on the tool sheet, it points in the direction of
the faces that will be kept on the target. If the vector is on the target sheet
(as with Make Corner) the vector points in the direction of the faces that
will be kept for the tool sheet.
Remove - This option works the same as Keep, but in reverse. When the
vector is on the tool sheet, the vector points in the direction of the faces that
will be discarded on the target.

Keep

Remove

Other Options
Enable Preview When you have specified enough parameters to create a
possible TRIM_AND_EXTEND feature, this option generates a preview of it
in the graphics window.
Keep Original Edges Use this option to keep the original edges on the
target or tool geometry. The input edges are unaffected by the trim or extend
operation, and remain in their original state. New edges are created based on
the output of the operation and are added as new objects
Tolerance Tolerance value used to create the feature. Default tolerance
value should be derived from Modeling tolerance.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

8-17

Modeling Free Form Features, Part 1

Activity Surface Extend and Trim


In this activity you will experiment with some of the methods of
extending and trimming surfaces.
Step 1:

Open the cdt_trim_extend part and start the Modelingapplication.

You will extend the narrow sheet body beyond the larger sheet
body, and then edit the trim and extend feature in different ways.
Step 2:

Set the Trim and Extend parameters.


Choose the Trim and Extend icon
on the Surface toolbar
or choose InsertTrimTrim and Extend.

8
You will first extend the small sheet body downward 25
millimeters, linearly.
Set the Limit option to Distance, the limit value to 25.00, and
the Extend Method to Natural Tangent.

8-18

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Modeling Free Form Features, Part 1

Turn on Enable Preview.

Step 3:

Select tangent edges to finish the first extension.


Turn on Tangent Curves (in the Selection Intent toolbar) and
select any of the lower edges on the small sheet body.
A preview of the feature displays.

OK the dialog.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

8-19

Modeling Free Form Features, Part 1

Step 4:

Edit the extension so it stops at the other sheet body.


Select the Trim and Extend feature.
Change the Limit to Until Selected.

The Tool Selection icon on the dialog will now be active.

Select the larger sheet body as the tool sheet.


A direction arrow will appear on the graphics screen. The
portion of the target sheet in the direction indicated will be
kept or removed, depending on the Region option setting.

8
Make sure the Region option setting is Keep, then OK the
dialog.

8-20

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Modeling Free Form Features, Part 1

Step 5:

Develop a corner
Select the Trim and Extend feature.
Turn on the Make Corner switch.

OK the dialog.

Both sheet bodies are now trimmed to their common


intersection, and are sewn together
Step 6:

Extend the front edge of the larger sheet and explore the other
Extend Methods.
Choose the Trim and Extend icon.
Set the Limit to Distance, set the distance to 60.0, and make
sure the Extend Method is set to Natural Tangent.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

8-21

Modeling Free Form Features, Part 1

Select the near long edge of the large face.

OK the dialog.
Note the shape of the extension.

Step 7:

Change the extension to be a Mirrored extension.


Select the Trim and Extend feature you just created.
Change the Extend Method to Mirrored.
OK the dialog.

8
This option mirrors the shape of the extension about the
original edge.

8-22

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Modeling Free Form Features, Part 1

Step 8:

Create a C2 linear extension.


Edit the Trim and Extend feature again by changing the
Extend Method to Natural Curvature.

This option starts curvature continuous at the original edge,


and transitions more and more to linear as it is extended.
The Percentage Limit method extends a surface by a specified
percentage of the length of other selected edges.
There are two more options when the dialog is expanded using
the More Options icon.

Keep Original Edges will create new faces, and maintain the
original edges.
Tolerance allows you to specify a tolerance different than the
default, if you wish.
OK the dialog.
Step 9:

Close the part.

Modeling Free Form Features, Part 1

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

8-23

Grid and Section Analysis


Section analysis and Grid Section Analysis have been combined into a
single function.
It is found with the Section Analysis icon or under
AnalysisShapeSection. The new dialog has all the functionality
of the two older dialogs.

The old Section Analysis objects will automatically be changed to Grid


Section
Analysis objects when a part is loaded in NX 4.

8-24

NX2-51

Modeling Free Form Features, Part 1

3D B-Spline Construction and Constraints

In NX 4 there is a new curve option called Studio Spline.


which is
available on the Curve toolbar (or InsertCurveStudio Spline).
Using Studio Spline, B-splines can maintain associativity when being
modified using X-Form, making it easier to create B-splines with the proper
shape.
The following enhancements have been made in the following areas:

8-52

Adding points, inserting points, moving points and deleting points while
developing splines.

Spline points can be constrained to a surfaces U or V direction.

Spline points can be "attached" to surfaces.

Inferred or specified constraints can be specified for spline points/poles.

Constraint handles for easier spline point/pole manipulation.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Modeling Free Form Features, Part 1

Defining Point and End Pole Constraints


Studio Spline allows continuity constraints to be applied to the defining
points of splines developed using points and the end poles of splines developed
using poles. Constraint symbols on the respective point/poles denote the type of
constraint.

No Constraints

G0 Constraint

G1 Constraint

G1 & G2
Constraints
There are two basic approaches to constraining spline points and end poles:
Inferred Constraints and Specified Constraints.
Inferred Constraints
Inferred constraints use geometry to "infer" continuity for a spline point or
end pole. When geometry is selected, the constraint options appear on screen
for selection.

Once specified, the inferred constraint displays constraint handles. There are
two versions of this handle; one for inferred constraints involving splines and
one for inferred constraints when dealing with surfaces.
Spline Inferred Constraint Handle

Surface Inferred Constraint Handle

Dragging the cone heads will move point along the U or V direction. Double
clicking on cone heads will align the curve to the U or V direction.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

8-53

Modeling Free Form Features, Part 1

Specified Constraints
If you do not use inferred constraints, you can explicitly specify a constraint;
it has its own handle
MB3

Specify Constraint Handle


The handle allows three types of
manipulation:
Lateral Arrow: Drag to change
tangent magnitude
Center Arrow: Drag to change
curvature
Sphere: Drag to change slope

Dynamic Positioning
If a node does not have any type of constraint, when it is selected you get
an Axis Drag/Rotate handle.
Axis Drag/Rotate Handle

This allows dragging/rotation for directional positioning of a point and


works like other NX dynamic handles.

8-54

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Modeling Free Form Features, Part 1

Activity Spline Creation Enhancements


In this activity you will be introduced to the new methods of creating
3D splines using points.
Step 1:

Open the cdt_spline_construct part and start the Modeling


application.

This is a simple planar spline by points; you will be using this


spline as you create your own.
Step 2:

Create a spline-by-points
Choose the Studio Spline icon
on the Curve toolbar or
choose InsertCurveStudio Spline.
Make sure the method is set to Through Points
Associative switch is on and Degree is set to 5.

the

You will emulate the displayed spline and interact with it a bit.
Indicate six locations that basically mimic the existing spline.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

8-55

Modeling Free Form Features, Part 1

Step 3:

Designate inferred constraints on the left end of the spline.


Rotate the part slightly to reveal the two lines with which you
will be interacting.

Select the left end point of your spline, hold down MB1 and
drag the node to the right end point of the left red line.

Since you are referencing other geometry (the end point of the
line), you are able to infer a constraint to that geometry, either
tangency (G1) or curvature (G2).
Choose the G2 icon.

8
Note the constraint symbol for the curvature inferred
constraint.
If you designate a G2 constraint, G1 for the same point
is assumed.

8-56

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Modeling Free Form Features, Part 1

Step 4:

Designate inferred constraints on the right end of the spline.


Repeat the above procedure for the right end point of your
spline, referencing the left end point of the right red line and
applying a G2 inferred constraint.
Rotate your model slightly to check the constraints.

Step 5:

Use Inferred Constraint Handles to change the slope of the spline.


Using MB1, click on the left most constrained node of your
spline.
You will see a Inferred Constraint handle appear.

Try dragging each cone head, in turn, to see how it affects the
slope of the spline. Use Ctrl-Z to cancel the modification.
Try doubleclicking on each cone head, in turn, to see how
it affects the tangency of the spline to the line. Use Ctrl-Z to
cancel the modification.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

8-57

Modeling Free Form Features, Part 1

Use MB3 on the end node.

Note the inferred constraints and your edit options:


Infer G1 or Infer G2 options are mutually exclusive with
Specify Constraint.
Delete Point deletes the point or pole of the spline, thus
changing its shape.
Delete G0 only removes the positional associativity to the
object.
Choose Disable Tool.
Step 6:

Move a middle spline point by using the Axis Drag/Rotate handle.


Select the middle node point of the spline.

8
At this point you could key a new XC,YC,ZC location, or drag
the respective cone heads or reference other geometry to effect
a translation of the node point.
In the Snap Point toolbar, make sure Point on Curve

8-58

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

is on.

mt10026_g NX 4

Modeling Free Form Features, Part 1

Select the center red cube and drag it down to the black spline.
It will "lock" onto the black spline. Position it in the middle of
the black spline and choose a G1 constraint.

Now you have a constraint handle which you could use to


modify slope or tangency direction as demonstrated earlier.
If you select and drag a node instead of clicking on it, you can
bypass using the axis handle.
Step 7:

Move another spline point by dragging.


Select the node to the immediate left of the one you just
modified and drag it down to the black spline. Again, it locks
onto the black spline and you can slide it along the black spline
until you find a suitable position.

Do not give this node a constraint.


Step 8:

Specify a constraint using the Specify Constraint handle.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

8-59

Modeling Free Form Features, Part 1

With your cursor over the right most point, use MB3Specify
Constraint.
The Specify Constraint handle appears.

Try dragging the cone heads and sphere to see how they change
the shape of the spline.
Use MB3 on this node after you experiment with the Specify
Constraint handle.
Note that the Inferred constraints are no longer in effect since
you put a defined constraint on the point.
In a Spline by Poles case, only the end points can be
specifically constrained.
Click on Infer G2 to return to the original state without a
specified constraint.
Step 9:

Try deleting a spline point and inserting spline point.


Use MB3Delete Point over the node third from the right end
of the spline.

8
Hopefully you now understand the idea how your mouse
buttons work in relation to designating inferred constraints
and manipulating spline point positioning.
8-60

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Modeling Free Form Features, Part 1

OK the Studio Spline dialog.


It is simple to insert additional defining points into a existing
spline.
Click on the spline you just created.
Position your cursor along the spline toward the left end, where
you want to insert an additional defining point.

Click to indicate the new point


Step 10: Experiment with adding, deleting and moving points; changing the
inferred constraints until you have a relatively smooth spline.

Remember to use Ctrl-Z to back up a step if you need to.


You can use it multiple times to back up multiple steps.
Step 11: Close the part.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

8-61

Modeling Free Form Features, Part 1

3D Spline Construction By Poles


Studio Spline By Poles work in a similar fashion as Spline Through Points
with a few differences.

MB3 on a pole allows you to insert a new pole between the selected pole
and next or previous pole (as well as the usual delete).

You can specify constraints only on the first and/or last pole of the spline,
using the Specify Constraint handle.

8-62

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Summary
In this lesson you:

Learned about new B-Spline curve smoothing procedures.

Learned how to smooth out irregular surface poles.

Became familiar with enhancements to surface extend and trim.

Learned how grid and section analysis have been combined.

Were introduced to new 3D B-Spline Construction and Constraints


(Studio Spline).

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

8-83

Lesson

9 Modeling Free Form


Features, Part 2
Purpose
Objectives
In this lesson, you will learn about the following functions that are new, or
have been enhanced for NX 4:

Emboss

Divide Face

Variational Sweep

Polygon Subdivision

Curve Fit Methods

Global Shaping

Offset Surface

Through Curves

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

9-1

Modeling Free Form Features, Part 2

Emboss
This is a new function for creating features for stiffening or locating geometry
on either solid or sheet bodies.

It is accessed by choosing the Emboss icon

or InsertDesign

FeatureEmboss.
It requires a section, a vector direction and a target body.
From these inputs the system will calculate a cap and sidewalls.

9-2

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Modeling Free Form Features, Part 2

Emboss Terminology
1. Target (sheet or solid) - The surface
(or quilt of surfaces) on the which
the emboss is built.
2. Section - The basic shape of the
emboss, created from a closed
collection of curves, edges, or a
sketch, on or off the target, on a
plane, or on other faces. The section
is usually planar but it can be 3D.
3. End Cap - The terminating surface
of the emboss. The parameters
used to specify the endcap will be
the floor (pocket) or ceiling (pad) of
the resulting geometry. Geometry
specified for the endcap does not
have to be part of the body being
modified.
4. Sidewalls - The walls of the emboss
join the target surfaces and the
endcap surfaces. These surfaces
can be either drafted or ruled.
Draft From - The option for creating sidewalls, indicating where the section is
drafted from or projected to:

from the Target

from the Endcap surface

from other geometry (Face)

from a plane (Datum)

None (not drafted from or projected to)

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

9-3

Modeling Free Form Features, Part 2

This projection constitutes the stationary entity from which the sidewalls
are drafted

A) represents the original section


B) represents the target
C) represents the endcap

Case 1 - Draft From is set to None, so the location of the section is stationary
when determining the drafted sidewalls.
Case 2 - the section is projected to the endcap surface to define the stationary
edge.
Case 3 - the section is projected to the target.
The locating plane can straddle the target (as shown above) or can be
completely above or below the target.

9-4

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Modeling Free Form Features, Part 2

Multi-Convexity

When the endcap intersects the target, you can create the emboss as a pad, a
pocket, or a mix of the two. If there is a draft angle, it is flipped on opposite
sides of the target.

Pad - If the vector hits the target surface before


the endcap surface, that is considered a pad.

Pocket - If the vector hits the endcap surface


before the target, that is a pocket.

Mixed

Vectors

Draft From - The vector (direction) along which the section is projected
(default is normal to the section). It is bidirectional.
Pull Direction - The vector used to define the draft (or the extrude if the
sidewalls are ruled).
Free Edge Vector - The vector used to trim a joggle - an emboss created when
the projected section goes beyond the target surface, and which therefore
must be trimmed in some way.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

9-5

Modeling Free Form Features, Part 2

Procedure
To create an emboss feature:
1. Choose the Emboss icon

on the Form Feature toolbar or

InsertDesign FeatureEmboss.
2. Use the Select Section or Sketch Section steps to select or create a closed
section.

Selection Intent is available. If you select a planar face, the


Sketcher opens to let you create a section on that face.
3. Select the Target face(s) to emboss.

4. Optional: set Enable Preview to on/off

9-6

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Modeling Free Form Features, Part 2

5. Set the End Cap methodology.

End Cap (Cap Geometry=Target Faces, Cap


Location=Translate From Target
If the preview disappears, the combination of options and
procedures you have specified are invalid for the selected
geometry. Change them until you get a preview of a valid emboss
feature. When the preview shows the emboss you want, your are
ready to create the feature
6. Set theSidewall methodology for shaping the sidewall.

Offset from Target, Distance set to .2


7. Choose OK (or MB2)

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

9-7

Modeling Free Form Features, Part 2

Activity - Creating an Emboss Feature


In this activity
Step 1:

Step 2:

Open the emboss part and start Modeling if required.

Define the closed section.


Choose theEmboss icon
on the Form Feature toolbar or
from InsertDesign FeatureEmboss.
Set the Cap Geometry method to Section.
Set the Sidewall Shape to Isocline Draft.
Verify Enable Preview is checked on.

Choose the Selection Section icon

Set the Selection Intent to Feature Curves.


Select the Sketch to define the section geometry, then accept
with MB2.
Verify that the Target icon is active

. If not, choose it.

Set the Selection Intent to Body Faces and select one of the
faces of the sheet solid, verifying in the Quick Pick dialog if
necessary.

9-8

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Modeling Free Form Features, Part 2

OK to create the Emboss feature.

Open the Part Navigator.

Step 3:

Edit the End Cap method.


From the Part Navigator, double-click the Emboss feature.
Things to note:
With the cursor on any one of the labels in the graphics
area, you can click and drag it to another location.
You can also toggle the display of these labels on and off
with the F3 key. This key will also toggle the Emboss
dialog on and of as well.
Single clicking with the MB1 button on any label will
also alternately display other labels associated with
the Emboss feature.
Set Cap Geometry type to Selected Faces.
Set the Cap Location to Offset from Face.

Set Distance to .5.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

9-9

Modeling Free Form Features, Part 2

The Cue line is now asking you to select the face geometry you wish
to use to cap the new emboss feature. Notice that the Selection
Step, End Cap

icon is also selected.

Select one of the top faces of the Target Sheet solid and confirm
if necessary.
OK.

The color of the newly created emboss feature will take on


the color of the original sheet solid.
Step 4:

Edit the End Cap method again.


Double click the Emboss feature from the Part Navigator again.
Change the End Cap Distance to .2.
Verify under the More options function, that Multi Convexity is
set to Mixed.
OK.

9-10

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Modeling Free Form Features, Part 2

Notice that because of the negative value, the Cap is now below
the highest Target face. In a sense, NX has created both Pocket
and Pad like topology. This is because the Multi Convexity option
is Mixed.
Repeat Step 4, this time changing the Multi Convexity to the
Pocket or Pad option.
Choose FileCloseReopen Selected Partsemboss.prt.
Step 5:

Create the End Cap with surface geometry.


Make Layer 3 Selectable.

Choose the Emboss icon


on the Form Feature toolbar or
choose InsertDesign FeatureEmboss.
Set Cap Geometry to Selected Faces.
Set Cap Location to In Place.
Verify under the More options function, that Multi Convexity is
set to Mixed.

Choose the Selection Section icon


portion of the dialog.

in the Selection Steps

Set the Selection Intent to Feature Curves and select the


Sketch to define the section geometry and accept with MB2
Verify that the Target icon

is active. If not, choose it.

Set the Selection Intent to Body Faces and select one of the
faces of the sheet solid, verifying in the Quick Pick dialog if
necessary and
Accept with MB2.
Notice the Cue line is now asking you to select a face in addition to
the Section geometry to define the End Cap. Also notice that the
selection Step has advanced to the End Cap icon

Select the sheet solid located on Layer 3.


-

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

9-11

Modeling Free Form Features, Part 2

OK.
Offset from Face could also be applied here.
Make Layer 3 Invisible.
Step 6:

Edit the Sidewall method of the emboss feature.


Double click the Emboss feature from the Part Navigator again.
Set the Sidewall Shape to Extrude.
MB2 or OK.
The sidewalls no longer have draft.

Step 7:

Edit the Sidewall Draft From method.


Double click the Emboss feature from the Part Navigator again.
Set Sidewall Shape back to Isocline Draft.
Set Draft from to Target
OK.

Step 8:

Close the part.

9-12

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Modeling Free Form Features, Part 2

Divide Face The EditFaceSubdivide Face has been replaced with


InsertTrimDivide Face.
The new function has many new features:

Improved user interaction.

Divide multiple faces in one feature.

Use Selection Intent to pick faces for division, and to pick dividing objects.

Use curves, edges, faces, and datum planes as dividing objects.

Specify the projection direction for dividing objects.

Preview the face division result.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

9-13

Modeling Free Form Features, Part 2

Activity - Using Dividing Face


This activity will show you how you can use Divide Face in NX4 to subdivide
faces in a part.
Step 1:

Set up for using Divide Face.


Open the divide_face part and make sure the Modeling
application is running.

Make Layer 22 Selectable.

Step 2:

Create the divided face.


Choose the Divide Face icon
on the Feature Operation
toolbar or InsertTrimDivide Face.

On the Selection Intent toolbar, make sure that the Collector is


set to Tangent Faces.

9-14

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Modeling Free Form Features, Part 2

With the Faces to Divide icon highlighted in the Divide Face


dialog, select one of the outside vertical faces on the part.

Use MB2 to advance to the Dividing Objects Selection Step.


With the Dividing Objects icon highlighted in the Divide Face
dialog, select one of the blue sketch curves.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

9-15

Modeling Free Form Features, Part 2

If the projection vector is pointing away from the part, select


the Reverse Direction icon in the Divide Face dialog.

The Enable Preview button allows you to see the result of


the operation before selecting OK.
Choose OK.
Change the display mode to a Wireframe with Hidden Edges to
view the now subdivided faces.

Notice that the Dividing Objects are imprinted on the Faces to


Divide.
Choose OK on the dialog.

Step 3:

9-16

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

Close the part.

mt10026_g NX 4

Modeling Free Form Features, Part 2

Variational Sweep
This new function allows you to create a feature by sweeping a section
(sketch) along one or more rails. It will vary the section as needed to meet
the sketch and V-Sweep constraints.

It allows you to create and constrain a sketch on the fly, or create a sketch
prior to entering the function.
It is accessed by choosing the Variational Sweep icon
InsertSweepVariational Sweep.

or

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

9-17

Modeling Free Form Features, Part 2

Activity - Creating a Variational Sweep Surface


In this activity, you will create a surface that is tangent to two existing
surfaces. The sections will consist of two arcs and a line in between the two
arcs. The new surface is to be tangent to both existing surfaces. The surface
will start and end with a circular section of 12 millimeter radius.
In this case you will create and constrain the sketch as part of creating the
Variational Sweep feature.
Step 1:

Set up to create a variational sweep surface.


Open the v-sweep_2 part and start the Modeling application.

Choose the Variational Sweep icon


InsertSweepVariational Sweep.
Step 2:

or

Create the sketch


Choose the Sketch Section icon on the dialog.
Make sure Normal to Path icon is showing in the options bar,
and select the right edge of the top left surface.

9-18

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Modeling Free Form Features, Part 2

Double-click on the Z axis, and then double-click on the X axis


so they point as shown below:

From the menu bar, use PreferencesSketch to turn Change


View Orientation off.
Choose OK on the icon option bar.
Step 3:

Create an intersection and the sketch curves.


When you created the sketch on path, the system created an
Intersection point where the sketch plane intersected the curve.
Intersections are used to constraint the sketch to stay on the
:rails. You need to create another Intersection for the second
rail.
Choose InsertIntersect.
Select the left edge of the lower right surface, and choose the
OK icon on the option bar.
Create two arcs and a line approximately as shown below.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

9-19

Modeling Free Form Features, Part 2

Dont worry if they are not created with the tangent


constraint.
Step 4:

Create additional constraints as needed so the two arcs are


Tangent to the axes that are parallel to the two corresponding
surfaces at the two intersections, and the ends of the arcs are
Coincident with the two intersections (named Vertices on the
Quick Pick dialog).

Step 5:

Constrain the two arcs so they have Equal Radii, and create a
dimension to constrain one of the arcs to have a radius of 12.0
millimeters.

The sketch should now be fully constrained.

9-20

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Modeling Free Form Features, Part 2

Step 6:

Complete the feature.


Choose the Finish icon

on the Sketcher toolbar.

Choose the OK icon on the dialog.

Step 7:

Close the part.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

9-21

Modeling Free Form Features, Part 2

Offset Surface
This function is now under a slightly different name, In previous versions, it
was InsertOffset/ScaleOffset. It is now called Offset Surface, but found
in the same place and with the same icon.
The dialog is different, and you can offset each face with only a single value,
but you can include many faces in the feature.
1. Approximate Offset Surfaces allows offset
surface geometry to be approximated,
allowing the feature more latitude during
computation.
2. Allow Step Boundaries allows you to
combine an offset value with a value of 0.0
for a face that is part of a smooth set of
faces.
3. Output Option One Feature for Connected
Faces will produce a single feature for all
connected selected faces. There may be
more than one feature created one will be
created for each set of connected faces,
4. Output Option One Feature for Each
Face will produce a single feature for each
selected faces.
This also enables the Normal Orientation
Method options.
5. When you create a constant offset surface,
the system must first generate edge curves.
Specify Interior Position allows you to
specify a location that will determine the
center of the selections all direction
arrows will point away from the specified
location.
6. Use Existing Normals will use the
direction of the positive face normal for
calculating the offsets.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

9-25

Modeling Free Form Features, Part 2

Activity - Creating an Offset Surface from Sewn Surfaces

Step 1:

Open the offset_surface part and make sure the modeling


application is running.
This part contains a sewn sheet body.

You need an offset surface in which the five near-horizontal faces


are offset 10 millimeters upward, and the angled faces are offset
15 millimeters to the right and upward.
Step 2:

Start the offset surface.


Choose the Offset Surface icon

or

InsertOffset/ScaleOffset Surface.
Choose the Offset Surface icon in the graphics window to
display the full dialog.
You are prompted to select the faces for the new set. Selection
Intent is available for this.
With Selection Intent set to Tangent Faces, select any of the
three faces on the left.

9
9-26

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Modeling Free Form Features, Part 2

Make sure Enable Preview is on.


Enter a value of 10.0, and press Enter.
If the direction arrow is not pointing upward, you may
need to double-click on the direction arrow to reverse it
(or use the Reverse Direction icon on the dialog).

Step 3:

Select the remaining faces for Set 1.


Select any of the two faces on the lower right also as part of
FaceSet1.

The offset surfaces for the first face set are now highlighted.

Step 4:

Select Set 2.

You want a different offset value for the angled faces.


Choose the Complete Set and Start Next Set icon on the dialog,
or use MB2.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

9-27

Modeling Free Form Features, Part 2

Select either of the two angled faces for the second face set.

Enter a value of 15 for FaceSet2, and press Enter.


Make sure the direction arrow is pointing up.
Use MB2 to complete the selection of set 2.

Choose the More Options icon on the dialog.


Leave the Output Options set to One Feature for Connected
Faces.
Choose OK to create the feature.

Rotate the part and use the Part Navigator to investigate the
results.

9
Step 5:

9-28

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

Close all parts.

mt10026_g NX 4

Modeling Free Form Features, Part 2

Activity - Creating Offset Surfaces Using the Allow Step Boundaries


Allow Step Boundaries allows you to offset some of a smooth set of faces a
distance of 0.0, and create a face that connects the two offset distances.

Step 1:

Open the part and start the Offset.


Open the offset_surface_step part and make sure the
Modeling application is running.
This part contains a surface that was created by extruding a
tangent continuous sketch, with draft.

You will now create an offset surface with distance of 20.0


millimeters upward for the two faces on the right, and a distance
of 0.0 for the face on the left.
Choose the Offset Surface icon

or

InsertOffset/ScaleOffset Surface.
Choose the Offset Surface icon in the graphics window to
display the full dialog.
Step 2:

Select the first face.


You are prompted to select the faces for the new set. Selection
Intent is available for this.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

9-29

Modeling Free Form Features, Part 2

With Selection Intent set to Single Face, select the face on


the far right.

Enter a value of 20.0 for FaceSet1, and press Enter.


Make sure the direction arrow is pointing up. If not,
double-click on it to reverse it. (You can also use the Reverse
Direction icon on the dialog.)
Step 3:

Select the second face.


Make sure Enable Preview is on.
Select the curved face in the middle.

Choose the More Options icon on the dialog.


Turn on Allow Step Boundary.
Use MB2 to complete the selection of set 1.
Step 4:

Complete the feature.


Select the face on the left for the second set of faces.

9
9-30

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Modeling Free Form Features, Part 2

Make sure the arrow is pointing up, and enter a value of 0.0,
and press Enter.
Choose OK to complete the feature.
Blank the extruded feature.

Examine the results.


Step 5:

Close all parts.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

9-31

Lesson

10 Modeling Sketcher
Purpose
This lesson introduces the enhancements to the Sketcher in NX 4.
Objectives
Once you finish this lesson, you will have an understanding of:

the new Create Inferred Constraints and Unconstrained mode

the new options for Sketch Dimension creation and editing

Part Navigator and Grouping Curves

Sketch Display Color

Sketch on Path

Intersections

Inferred Constraint Settings

Automatic Constraints

Sketching in Member Views

10
-

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

10-1

Modeling Sketcher

Unconstrained Mode
There is now an icon on the Sketch Constraints toolbar, named Create
Inferred Constraints.
This is on or active by default. With it on, constraints are created as you are
used to. When this is off, The symbols for constraints will be displayed as you
are creating the objects, but no constraints will be created.
With this off, the solver is not accessed as heavily, and it allows for creation of
huge amounts of objects without impacting system performance.
Pre-creation, with Create Inferred Constraint turned off.

After creation. Notice there are no constraints. The circle is tangent to the
line, but it is not associative.

When in Unconstrained mode, curves can be created relative to


objects that are NOT in the Work Part. That is, the constraint symbols
will appear before creation, but constraints will not be created.

10
10-2

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Modeling Sketcher

Inferred Constraint Settings Dialog


The appearance and makeup of the dialog has changed. Its functionality
has not.
The settings are chosen by a check box instead of selecting an icon.

The new Non-Associative Only setting at the bottom of the dialog (Reference
Outside Work Part) allows you to use any geometry outside of the work part
for creation of new geometry. In order to use this, Create Inferred Constraints
must be turned off. This thus allows you to use the location of geometry
outside the work part for location only. It will not allow you to constrain the
geometry to anything outside the work part

Automatic Constraints
The only change here is that you now have to select the curves to be
automatically constrained.
This is due to the ability to created unconstrained curves and constrained
curves in the same sketch.

10
-

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

10-3

Modeling Sketcher

Dimension Creation
There is now a new icon available on the options bar when creating
dimensions.

With it toggled on, all dimensions created (with the exception of Perimeter
dimensions) will be created as Reference Dimensions.
With it toggled off, all dimensions will be created as constraint dimensions.
This can also be controlled by a new option on the Sketch Dimension Dialog.
The second is Create Alternate Angle.
This will give the alternate solution to the pre-created angular dimension. It
only works when in preview mode. The icon will not do anything after the
dimension is actually created.

Editing Style of Sketch Dimensions


When in the Sketcher Task Environment, the full Drafting Annotation Style
dialog is now available for editing the style of dimensions.
Access this by using MB3Style, with the cursor over a dimension, or by
selecting one or more dimensions and then using MB3Style over one of the
selected dimensions.

10
10-4

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Modeling Sketcher

Activity - Editing Sketch Dimensions


Step 1:

Open the edit_sketch_dims part and start the Modeling


application.

Step 2:

Test out the new editing style of sketch dimensions.


Double-click on any of the curves to activate the sketch.

Select any or all of the sketch dimensions, and then use


MB3Style on any of the selected dimensions.
Edit the style of the dimensions as you wish.
Step 3:

Close the part.

10
-

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

10-5

Modeling Sketcher

Part Navigator
To enable the handling of a large number of unconstrained sketch curves, the
ability to group curves has been added to the Part Navigator.

10
10-6

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Modeling Sketcher

Activity - Grouping Curves


Step 1:

Set up for the activity.


Open the group_sketch_curves part and make sure the
modeling application is running.

These curves were created as part of a sketch, but they were


created unconstrained.
You would like to create three groups to be able to better control
their visibility.
Display the Part Navigator, and expand the nodes so you can
see the curves that belong to the sketch.

Step 2:

Create a Group.
You are going to create three groups one for lines, one for arcs,
and one for circles.
You will first create the group for the lines.

10
-

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

10-7

Modeling Sketcher

Double-click (with MB1) on any of the curves to activate the


sketch.

Choose InsertNew Group.


Select the four lines on the screen, and then choose OK.
Enter LINES in the GROUP dialog, and then choose OK.
In the Part Navigator, expand the new group.

Step 3:

Create another group for the circles.


Choose InsertNew Group.
Select the four circles on the screen, and then choose OK.
Enter CIRCLES in the GROUP dialog, and then choose OK.

10
10-8

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Modeling Sketcher

In the Part Navigator, expand the new group.

Notice that the green folder icon is now next to the CIRCLES
group you just created. This indicates that it is the Active Group.
Step 4:

Create a third group for the arcs (fillets) in a different way, without
selecting the arcs.
Choose InsertNew Active Group.

Notice that the new group is not named.


Click on Group (in the Part Navigator). Then click on it again
to allow you to edit the name.

10
-

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

10-9

Modeling Sketcher

Enter the name ARCS, and then click elsewhere to complete


the edit.

Notice that the green folder icon is now next to the ARCS group
you just created. This indicates that it is the Active Group.
Step 5:

Move the arcs to a new group.


In the Part Navigator, select all four arcs (Arcs 1, 3, 4, and 5).
With the cursor over the selected items, hold down MB1 and
drag the arcs to the ARCS group.

Release MB1.

The four arcs now belong to the ARCS group, and it is the active
group. That means that any curve now created will automatically
become part of the group.

10
10-10

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Modeling Sketcher

Step 6:

Create another circle, that is unconstrained, in the middle of the


other circles and make it a part of the CIRCLES group.
With the cursor over the Group CIRCLES node, choose
MB3Active.
The green folder is now next the CIRCLES group.
Make sure Create Inferred Constraints is off (without the
orange background).
Choose the Circle icon on the Sketch Curves toolbar.
Create a new circle in the middle of the part.

Notice that the new circle belongs to the group CIRCLES.

You can use the check boxes in the Part Navigator to


control the visibility of curves in a sketch.
Step 7:

Close the part.

10
-

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

10-11

Modeling Sketcher

Editing Sketch Curves


When you edit curves that belong to a sketch, graphical feedback will be
supplied to show you the possible constraints.

10
10-12

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Modeling Sketcher

Sketch Color Preferences


You can control all sketch object colors with the Sketch Preferences dialog,
on the Colors tab.

Display Object Color


There is a new switch on the Sketch Preferences dialog: Display Object Color.
There is also a Display Object Color icon

for this.

With Display Object Color turned on (icon active or depressed), all objects in a
sketch will be displayed in the Object Color, not the sketch color, at all times.
With Display Object Color turned off (icon inactive or not depressed), all
objects in the sketch will be displayed in the sketch color when the sketch is
active just as in recent releases.

10
-

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

10-13

Modeling Sketcher

Sketch on Path
Sketch on Path is a new sketch creation function that allows you to create a
sketch on a plane that is normal (or tangent) to a curve or set of curves.
The function was created primarily for the new Variable Sweep function.
Variable Sweep has the ability to create a sketch, create and constrain curves
in that sketch, within the process of creating a Variable Seep feature.
You can also use the Sketch on Path function outside of the Variable Sweep
function as well.
For creating a sketch, the option bar has a new choice:

The default setting is Sketch in Place (shown above). This works the same as
the create sketch function did in previous versions.
By choosing the small triangle to the right of the icon, you can change to
Sketch on Path. This is the new capability.

The option bar then changes:

The second icon on the option bar (active by default when the option bar is
first accessed) is for selecting the path that you want the sketch related to.

10
10-14

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Modeling Sketcher

Sketch on Path Options


The third icon on the option bar allows you to choose how you want the sketch
plane to be oriented.

Normal to Path will keep the sketch plane normal to the selected
path.
Normal to Vector will orient the sketch plane normal to a specified
vector.
Parallel to Vector will orient the sketch plane parallel to a specified
vector.
Through Axis will constrain the sketch plane to always pass
through the selected axis.

10
-

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

10-15

Modeling Sketcher

Activity - Sketch on Path


Step 1:

Open the sketch_on_path part and start the Modeling application.

You want to create a sketch of a circle that is normal to the spline,


at its near end.
Step 2:

Designate the path for the sketch.


Choose the Sketch icon.
Change (if necessary) the first icon on the option bar to Sketch
on Path.

Make the Path icon active (on the option bar), and set the
orientation icon to Normal to Path.

Select the spline.

10
10-16

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Modeling Sketcher

Step 3:

Locate the Sketch Plane


Slide the origin handle to the far left end of the spline.

Double-click on the Z axis handle to reverse its direction.

Choose OK.
Step 4:

Create the geometry.


Create a 24.0 millimeter diameter circle and constrain its
location to be on the two datum axes.

Choose the Finish Sketch icon.

Step 5:
-

10

Close all parts.


NX2NX4 CAD Transition

10-17

Modeling Sketcher

Intersections
This is a new function which is part of the process of constraining a sketch to
a path or paths.
It is used mostly for the Variable Sweep function.
It is found on Sketch Operations toolbar, or on the Insert menu when in the
Sketcher Task Environment.

They are displayed as Existing Points and are named Vertex. They are
displayed where the selected curve(s) intersect the sketch plane.

An Intersection is automatically created on the selected path when a Sketch


on Path is created.
Sketch curves can be constrained to Intersections, and thus force the curve to
follow the path as a Variable Sweep feature is created.
By creating Intersections on several curves that intersect the sketch plane
(and constraining the sketch curves to those Intersections) you can effectively
force the Variable Sweep feature to follow several rails.
See the information on Variable Sweep in the Modeling Free Form, or the
Shape Studio lesson in this course.

10
10-18

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Modeling Sketcher

Sketch in Member View


In Drafting, you can now create a sketch and sketch curves in a member view
on a drawing without having to expand the view.

If there are any views on the active drawing, you will be asked to select the
view you wish the sketch to reside in.
This is also covered in the Drafting Transition lesson.

10
-

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

10-19

Modeling Sketcher

Project
When projecting non-sketch curves and edges onto a sketch, Selection Intent
is now used.

This gives you more control over the contents of the Projected feature. If the
model changes, curves can be automatically added to the feature.
If you want to make sure that no problems result by new curves automatically
being added to the Project feature, it may be helpful to convert them to
Reference. For that reason a new option has been added to the Convert
To/From Reference function, to allow you to easily select all the curves in the
Project feature.
Convert To/From Reference
The Convert To/From Reference dialog has a new option that allows you to
quickly convert all the curves that belong to a Project feature.

With this option turned on, the entire Project feature will be selected.

10
10-20

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Modeling Sketcher

Summary
In this lesson you:

learned about the new Create Inferred Constraints and Unconstrained


mode

tried out the new options for Sketch Dimension creation and editing

learned about grouping Curves and the Part Navigator

were appraised on the new Sketch Display Color switch on the Sketch
Preferences dialog

were introduced to Sketch on Path enhancements

learned about the new Intersection Sketch operation and how it works
with Variable Sweep

got an overview of how the Inferred Constraint Settings dialog has


changed

were updated on the changed procedure for using Automatic Constraints


with curves

learned about Sketching in Member Views in the Drafting application

10
-

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

10-21

10

11

Lesson

11 Modeling Curves
Purpose
This lesson will familiarize you with what is new in the curves functionality
in the Modeling application.
Objectives
In this section, you will become familiar with enhancements to the following
functions:

Associative Curves.

Associative Points.

Offset Curve in Face

Text to Curve

Intersection Curve

Edit Curve Length (was edit arc length)

Curve Fit Methods

Fit Spline

Project Curve

Bridge Curve

Cloud Sections

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

11-1

Modeling Curves

11

Associative Basic Curves

The new Associative Basic Curves function in NX 4 has the following


characteristics:

11-2

Allows you to create points, lines and arcs that are both associative and
parametric.

Allows you to create associative 3D wireframe.

Every associative curve is created as an individual feature with a


timestamp.

The interaction and use of associative curves is similar to the behavior of


sketcher curves.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Modeling Curves

11

Activity Creating Associative Lines


In this activity, you will create two associative lines using tangent
points and center points. You will observe the associativity first hand
as you edit the parent curves.
Step 1:

Open the cdt_abc_curves part and start the Modeling application.

You will be creating a line from a tangent point on the large arc to
a tangent point on the smaller arc.
Step 2:

Create a line with tangent endpoints.


Choose the Line icon
from the Curve toolbar or choose
InsertCurveLine.
The Line dialog displays.
Verify that the Associative option is checked.

If the Associative option is not selected, non-associative


lines will be created instead.
Select the Constraint Method drop down arrow to display the
available constraint methods for the first endpoint.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

11-3

Modeling Curves

11
Select the Start=Tangent icon
constraint method.

to set the first tangent

Select a tangent point on the upper portion of the larger arc.

Set the End=Tangent icon


Constraints option.

using the second drop down

Select a tangent point on the upper portion of the smaller arc.

The line is displayed. Notice the drag handles displayed near


the ends of the newly created line.

11-4

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Modeling Curves

Step 3:

11

Drag the tangent line.


Place your cursor on the drag handle (the arrow head) of the
left end of the line (near the smaller arc) and extend the line to
the left until it is a line of about 8.0 in length.

Choose OK to create the line.

Step 4:

Edit the curve to test associativity.


Choose the Edit Curve Parameters icon
from the Edit
Curve toolbar or choose EditCurveParameters.
Toggle the Edit Arc/Circle By option to Dragging.
Select the larger arc (on the right) and drag/resize the arc so
that it is some measure larger than its original size.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

11-5

Modeling Curves

11
Choose Update to update the graphics window. Observe the
tangency of the associative line.
Note that the associative line retains its tangency to the larger
curve. The line responds to the change in the geometry.

Choose OK to save your updates.


Step 5:

Create another associated line which spans from the arc center of
one arc to a tangent point on the other arc
Choose the Line icon
InsertCurveLine.
Set the Point icon
option.

11-6

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

from the Curve toolbar or choose

under the first drop down Constraints

mt10026_g NX 4

Modeling Curves

11

Select the arc center of the smaller arc (left).


Be sure that you have the arc center selected. You can
confirm that you have the arc center selected when you
see the smaller arc center icon appear near the
selection cursor (as shown below). You may want to set
Snap Point to Arc Center to facilitate selection.

Choose the drop down arrow to view the available Constraint


Methods for your second point selection.
Examine the available Constraint Methods. Notice that there
are five additional constraint methods available. They are
angle, along X, along Y, along Z and normal.
Select the End=Tangent icon
method.

to set the second constraint

Now, select a tangent point on the lower portion of the larger


arc (right).

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

11-7

Modeling Curves

11

Choose OK.
The second associative line is created.
Step 6:

Examine what happens to the associated lines when you move


one of the curves
Choose EditTransform.
The Transform dialog displays.
Select the arc on the left.

Choose OK.
Choose Translate.
Choose To A Point.
The Point Constructor dialog appears.
Select the Arc/Ellipse/Sphere center icon.
Select the arc center of the left arc to define the translation
reference point.
Choose the Cursor Location icon.

11-8

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Modeling Curves

11
Select a location just below the current arc location to define
the translation destination point.

Choose Move on the Transformations dialog.


The arc is moved to the new location. The associated lines in
turn move to retain their association with the new location of
the arc.

Choose Cancel.
The associative lines were created as individual features in
the part.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

11-9

Modeling Curves

11

Step 7:

Verify creation of the features.


Select the part navigator

from the resource bar.

Click your right mouse button in the part navigator window to


access the pop-up options. If necessary, choose the Timestamp
Order view.
As you can see, the two lines were created as features.

Close the part navigator window.


Step 8:

11-10

Close the part.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Modeling Curves

11

Other Associative Curves


Associative Curves with Solids
Solids created using associative curves are associated to those parent
curves. If the parent curves change, the updates are reflected in the solids
constructed using them.

Associative Mirror Curves


In the past, when the source curves/edges of a mirror operation changed, you
had to manually change the mirrored curves again. The associative mirror
curve will be now update the mirrored curves automatically to reflect changes
in the geometry.

Lines and Arcs

See the appendix for basic procedures on creating lines and arcs.
-

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

11-11

Modeling Curves

11

Associative Points
Associative Points are smart points that are associated to their parent. If
their parent changes, the updates are reflected in the associated points.

When you choose the Point icon


from the Curve toolbar (or
InsertDatum/PointPoint), the Point icon options are displayed in the
upper left corner of the graphics window. You can create Associative and
Non-associative points by selecting the appropriate icon.
Associative Point

Non-Associative Point

Edit Offset Point


You can now edit the offset values and/or the selected inputs without
completely redefining the point.

11-12

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Modeling Curves

11

Activity Creating Associative Points


To examine how smart points are associated to their parent
Step 1:

Open the cdt_abc_points part and start the Modeling application.

Step 2:

Define some associative points.


Choose the Point icon
from the Curve toolbar or choose
InsertDatum/PointPoint.
The Associative Point icon
should already be selected. If
necessary, select this icon option.
Select the following locations to create associative points along
the block. Create associative points 1-4 as noted below.

Step 3:

Create some non-associative points.


Choose the non-associative point icon option.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

11-13

Modeling Curves

11
Select the following locations to create non-associative points
along the block. Create non-associative points 5-9 as noted
below.

Step 4:

Edit the block parameters to see the behavior of the associative


and the non-associative points.
Choose EditFeatureEditParameters
Choose Block(0) from the list.
The Edit Parameters dialog is displayed.
Choose OK.
Choose the Feature Dialog option.
Notice that the block is 4x4x4. Edit the parameters such that
the block is now half its size.
Change the following parameters:
X length = 2
Y length = 2
Z length = 2

11-14

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Modeling Curves

11

Choose OK three times.


The non-associative points remain in their original locations.
The associative points retain their association to the block.

Step 5:

Close the part.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

11-15

Modeling Curves

11

Offset Curves
Offset Curves
(InsertCurve from CurvesOffset), now uses
the Selection Intent toolbar instead of the old selection dialog for
selection of curves to offset.

This gives far more control over later geometry updates.

11-16

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Modeling Curves

11

Offset in Face
Several changes have been made to the Offset in Face dialog.

Selection Steps have been added to make selection of faces and curves easier.
The system still automatically selects faces when curves are selected, but the
Selection Steps make it easier to change what is selected.
The Complete Set and Start Next Set Selection Step makes it easier to control
the makeup of each set.
The Trim Corner icons have been replaced by a simple on/off switch: Trim
and Extend to Each Other.
The Boundary icons have been replaced by a simple on/off switch: Extend
to Face Edges.
There is a new Offset Mode option called Tangential, and is calculated as
shown below:

In previous versions it was difficult to create a second offset curve for a given
set. That has been simplified by the addition of MB3Add Offset to Section
(on the set list in the dialog).
Tolerance, Enable Preview and Apply are new to the dialog.
-

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

11-17

Modeling Curves

11
Intersection Curve You can now select multiple objects in the input sets to perform an
intersection operation. A new Preview option has been added. You can
preview the output geometry, apply diagnostics on it and change the input
geometry, as needed.

11-18

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Modeling Curves

11

Activity - Intersecting Curves Using Two Sets of Objects


Step 1:

Identify the first set of objects for Intersection Curves.


Open the intersect_curve part.
Start the Modeling application (if necessary).

Choose Intersection Curve

from the Curve toolbar or

InsertCurves From BodiesIntersect.


You want your intersection curve to be associative to the
intersection objects and you also want to be able to preview the
intersection curves before creating them.
Verify that the Associative option is toggled on.
Verify that the Enable Preview option is toggled on.

Verify that the First Set icon


plane.

Step 2:

Identify the second set of objects for Intersection Curve.


Choose the Second Set icon
step

is active. Select the datum

or MB2 to advance to this

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

11-19

Modeling Curves

11

Select all cylindrical faces.

Step 3:

Preview the Intersection Curve.


With the Enable Preview option turned on, you should now see the
intersection curve.
Rotate your part to examine the curve intersection.

11-20

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Modeling Curves

11

Choose OK to create the intersection curves.

Step 4:

Edit the input geometry.


Associative intersection curves can be edited by adding or
removing objects to or from the sets of intersection objects.
Choose MB3Rendering StyleStatic Wireframe to view the
wireframe edges.
Open the Part Navigator.
You will need to be in a Timestamp Order view.
Double-click the Intersection Curves feature from the Part
Navigator.
The Intersection Curve dialog for editing is displayed.
Choose the First Set

and the current set is highlighted.

Choose the Second Set


and the object set is highlighted.
At this point, you can select objects to be added or removed from
the selection steps. Anything that was previously used to define
the object sets to create this intersection can be reselected at this
time for editing.
Cancel the Intersection Curve dialog.
-

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

11-21

Modeling Curves

11

Close the Part Navigator.


Step 5:

Edit the intersection curve parameters.


All intersection curves that are created with the associative
output option will update automatically when changes are made
to their defining geometry. Non-associative curves will not update
automatically when changes are made to the defining geometry. In
this example, the datum plane was used to define the
intersection curve. Edit the angle of the datum plane and observe
the associativity of the intersection curve.
Double-click the datum plane.

The angle value is a negative 30 degrees.


Key in 45 as the new Angle value and press Enter.

11-22

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Modeling Curves

11

Choose OK to accept the new value.

The intersection curve is updated to reflect the angle change of the


datum plane parameter.
Step 6:

Close the part.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

11-23

Modeling Curves

11

Text to Geometry
Text to Geometry is currently only available on the Windows platform.
Text to geometry will now create text that follows along curves and surfaces.
You can now also create text as a full associative text feature.

This text option will generate NX curves from the True Type fonts in your
native Windows font library. You can use this function whenever text is
required as a design element in your part models.
You can create three types of text:
Planar text

Along Curve This is new for NX 4

On Face This is new for NX 4

11-24

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Modeling Curves

11

Activity - Generating Text Along Curve


You can create text along a connected curve. By default, each created text
character will follow the direction of the curve.
Step 1:

Setting up for Text


Open the text_curve part.
Make sure the Modeling application is running (if necessary).
Choose the Text icon

from the Curve toolbar or choose

InsertCurveText.
Choose the On Curve icon

from the Text dialog.

Turn on Associative Output.


This will associate the text to the curve.
Turn on Join Curves.
Select the spline towards the left half (as shown below).

Take note of which end is selected when selecting your curve. This
sets the start direction of your text.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

11-25

Modeling Curves

11

Step 2:

Preview the Text


Choose the Preview icon

or choose MB2.

Because the text option is a modal operation, it will utilize


any previous choices you may have used prior to this.
Therefore, your preview text may not appear exactly as
shown in the above image. If this is the case, then you will
need to either zoom in on your text if it is too small or fit
your view if your text is too large. Then proceed to the
next step for details regarding the use the text handles to
modify the shape of your text.

11-26

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Modeling Curves

Step 3:

11

Modify the Shape with Text Handles


There are several handles and on-screen input fields that can be
used to modify the appearance and location of your text.
Review the following descriptions and experiment with the
handles to modify your text.

Item

Description

Start Direction This conehead represents the start


direction of the text. Your start direction is based on where
you select the curve. Double click the conehead to reverse
the direction of your text
Stretch Dragging these anchors along the curve will
stretch the text along the curve itself.
Vertical Height Drag these coneheads to control the
vertical height of your text.
Center This is the center anchor. Use this to slide your
text along the curve.
Vertical Offset and Orientation Drag this conehead to
control the vertical offset location of your text to the curve.
Double clicking the conehead will flip the text orientation
about the selected curve.
Percentage along Curve The parameter value represents
the percentage to which the center text anchor is located
from the starting end of the curve. This value increases as
you move away from the starting endpoint of the curve.

2
3
4
5

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

11-27

Modeling Curves

11

Step 4:

Create the Text


Once you are satisfied with the appearance and placement of your
text, you are now ready to create your text.
Choose OK to create the text.

Step 5:

Edit the Curve


You can edit the curve and your text will follow the modified curve
shape.
Open and pin the Part Navigator.
Make sure Timestamp Order is on.
Double click on the Sketch (3) PROFILE feature in the Part
Navigator and edit the dimensional values.

Choose Finish Sketch


to accept the edits and notice the
text has update along the curve.
Double click on the A Text (5) feature in the Part Navigator
and edit the text string to read Prt. No. NX4 and watch the
string dynamically update.

Select OK to make the changes permanent.


Step 6:
11-28

Close your part.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Modeling Curves

11

Activity - Text On Face


Text can be created on one or more connected faces. It can be aligned along a
face, along a selected curve or from a point along a vertical direction.
Step 1:

Create the initial text on face.


Open the text_surface part.
Make sure the Modeling application is running (if necessary).
Choose the Text icon

Choose the On Face icon

from the Curve toolbar.

from the Text dialog.

Toggle on (check) the Project Curves, Associative Output and


Join Curves options.
Select the face between the two collars.

Choose the Curves on Face icon


the next step.

or MB2 to advance to

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

11-29

Modeling Curves

11

Choose the existing curve on the surface on the left end.

You can always double-click the starting direction


conehead to reverse the text direction.
Step 2:

Preview the Text


Choose the Preview icon.

If your preview text is inverted, you can flip the text


orientation:
F3 function key will hide the input field for a better
view the text handles (press the F3 key again show
the input fields).
Double-click on the center conehead to flip the text

11-30

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Modeling Curves

Step 3:

11

Adjust the text using the dynamic handles.


If needed, use the text handles to size and position your text
as desired.

If needed, choose one of the vertical coneheads located at either


end of the text string and drag in the vertical direction desired
to adjust the text height.
Step 4:

Rotate the surface.


Choose the Rotate icon

from the View toolbar.

Rotate the surface to get a better perspective of the text.

Since you have set the Project Curve option on, the text will be
projected onto the surface.
-

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

11-31

Modeling Curves

11

Choose OK to create the text.

The text is projected onto the surface.


Step 5:

11-32

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

Close your part.

mt10026_g NX 4

Modeling Curves

11

Edit Curve Length and Trim Curve


For NX 4 the Edit Arc Length has been renamed to Edit Curve Length. The
dialog has also changed.

The function is the same, but with some changes:

You can drag the ends of the original curve (as well as by inputting
values). This allows you to see the results prior to completing the edit.

You can now edit both ends of the curve at the same time.

The Selection Step, associated filters and the Confirm Upon Apply have
been removed.

Use the Edit Curve Length option to extend or trim a curve by a given curve
length increment. This option creates separate features that it adds to the
existing curve.
Trim Curve The order of the selection steps on the Trim Curve dialog
has changed. The String to Trim icon now appears first in the order of the
selection steps.
New Order of Selection Steps

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

11-33

Modeling Curves

11

Activity - Editing Curves


Step 1:

Edit the spline by dragging its end handles.


Open the edit_curve part and make sure the modeling
application is running.

Choose the Edit Curve Length icon

or

EditCurveCurve Length.
Select the spline.
Set the Method to Incremental, the Side to Symmetric, and
Direction to Natural.
Set the Output: Associative on and Blank Original.
Drag the handle at either end of the curve to 20.0.
Choose OK.

Step 2:

Use the New Curve Trim Selection Steps


Make Layer 42 Selectable.
Choose the Trim Curve icon

11-34

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

or EditCurveTrim.

mt10026_g NX 4

Modeling Curves

11

Make the following settings on the dialog:


Single Selection
Relative to WCS
Use Inferred Intersection
Trim Bounding Objects off
Reuse Bounding Objects off
Associative Output
Blank Input Curves
Select the spline as the String to Trim.
Select one of the two lines as the First Bounding Object.
Select the other line as the Second Bounding Object.
Choose OK.

Practice using the new selection steps order.


Step 3:

Close the part when you are done.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

11-35

Modeling Curves

11

Project Curve
The Project Curve function now has join and fit options on the creation dialog.

The Curve Join Methods allow you to create a join curve at the same time
several curves are being projected. This was only available by using the Join
Curve function after creating the Projected Curve.
Also, when you project curves Along a Vector, at an Angle to Vector, or Equal
Arc Length, the projection direction is now associative.

Modeling Curves

Bridge Curve
The arrangement of the dialog is slightly different. The only functional
change is that you can now constrain the curve to lie on a face, for tangent
continuous bridge curves. This enables you to bridge two curves that lie on a
surface, and have the bridge curve associative to the surface as well. There is
a new selection step for this.

11

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

11-53

Modeling Curves

11

Activity - Bridging Two Curves on a Surface


You are going to create a tangent continuous bridge curve between the two
existing Curve On Surface curves. You want to be able to edit the shape of the
surface and see all the curves remain on the surface.

Step 1:

Open the bridge_curve part and make sure the modeling


application is running.

Step 2:

Create the Bridge Curve


Choose the Bridge Curve icon
CurvesBridge.

or InsertCurve from

Make the following settings on the dialog:


Tangent Continuity Method
Associative Output
Select the curve on the left (in its right half) as the First Curve
Select the curve on the right (in its left half) as the Second
Curve
Select the surface as the Constraining Face.
Choose OK. until the part updates and the dialog disappears.

Step 3:

Edit the Surface


Choose the Move Pole icon

or EditSurfaceMove

Pole.
Select the surface.
11-54

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Modeling Curves

11

Choose Entire Row (constant v).


Select the second row from the left.

Step 4:

Complete the Edit


Drag the row upward approximately as shown:

Choose OK on the dialogs until the part updates.

Close all parts.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

11-

Modeling Curves

11

Geometric Properties
Geometric Properties now allows you to see radius of curvature and location
information dynamically as you float the cursor over a curve or surface.

This is found on the Analysis pull-down menuAnalysisGeometric


Properties.
The Free Form Transition course has a small activity that uses this function
on a surface.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

11-61

Modeling Curves

11

Summary
In this lesson you:

11-62

learned about creating basic associative curves.

were told about using associative curves to generate solids and about
creating associative mirror curves

demonstrated the use of associative points.

learned about the enhancements to the Curve Fit Method.

learned about the text to curve enhancements

learned about the point output function available when sectioning curves

learned about new intersect curve functionality

learned about the curve editing user interface enhancements

learned about Project Curve

became familiar with changes Bridge Curve

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Lesson

12 Assemblies

12

Purpose
This lesson introduces the new changes and enhancements to the Assemblies
application in NX 4.
Objectives
In this lesson, you will learn about the following:

Create New Parent

Reference Sets Enhancements

Assembly Cut

Assembly Arrangements

Assembly Sequencing and Motion.

Using the new filtering to displaying a partial assembly listing in the


Assembly Navigator

Partially updating the structure in the Assembly Navigator

Clearance Analysis

Accessing Weight Management

Display Instancing: Facet Sharing.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

12-1

Assemblies

Creating a New Parent Assembly


In NX 4, you can quickly create a new parent assembly for your current
Displayed Part. Also, the current Display Part must be a Master Part. The

12

last active arrangement of the previous Displayed Part will be used to orient
the occurrences in the new parent part. The newly created parent assembly
is a completely new NX part.
When an Undo is performed right after creating new parent, the new part
that becomes empty basically the components are removed from the new
parent part.
The Create New Parent option gives you an easier way to build more complex
assemblies when you are doing bottom up assembly design.
Procedure: Creating a New Parent Assembly
1. Choose the Create New Parent
icon (typically added to the
Assemblies toolbar), or choose AssembliesComponentsCreate New
Parent from the main menu.

The New Part File dialog appears, except the Non-Master Part option is
not present, and the Units default to the units of the current work part.
2. Key in a new name for the new parent assembly.
3. Change the other options on the dialog as needed.
4. Choose OK.
The new assembly now becomes the displayed part and work part in your
current session. (Creating the new parent does not close the original
assembly.)

12-2

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Assemblies

Reference Sets Enhancement


In NX 4, you are able to create and maintain reference sets to which new
components are added automatically when components are added to an
assembly.
The Add Components Automatically option on the Create Reference Sets
dialog, when toggled on, causes components to be added to the reference set
automatically when they are added to the assembly.

This property can be used to maintain Model and Lightweight reference sets
for assemblies, but is also available for general use. For example, you might
want to maintain a SIMPLE reference set both for assemblies and for piece
parts. While new components will be added automatically to reference sets
that have this property set, nothing will be done to prevent the components
from being removed subsequently.
When a new component is added to an assembly, it will be added to all
reference sets for which the Add Components Automatically property is set,
according to these rules:

If the work occurrence is currently represented by the reference set,


then the component will be added using the reference set provided to
add component this seems to match the intent defined in the Add
Component interaction.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

12-3

12

Assemblies

If the reference set is a managed reference set and the component


contains a corresponding managed reference set, then that will be used
this seems to match the intent of our best practices. Managed reference
sets are shown in the Customer Defaults dialog.

If the component contains a reference set of the same name as the


reference set to which the component is being added, then this will be used
this facilitates the creation of user-defined hierarchical reference sets

If a model reference set is defined then this will be used.

Otherwise, Entire Part will be used.

12

The Add New Components Automatically toggle will also be added to the Edit
Attributes dialog for the reference set that indicates whether new components
are added to the reference set automatically or not. Changing this toggle will
change the reference set behavior. The transition from Off or On will set the
add components automatically property on the reference set and ensure that
all of the current components in the assembly are added to the reference set.
The current contents of the reference set will not be changed.

12-4

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Assemblies

The toggle will be available for all reference sets, including managed
reference sets.

12
This new functionality leaves all other reference set functionality unchanged.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

12-5

Assemblies

WAVE Geometry Linker


There is a new option on the WAVE Geometry Linker dialog that allows
creation of a linked Datum Coordinate System.

12

12-6

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Assemblies

Assembly Cut
It is sometimes necessary to create a cutaway view of an assembly for
illustrations or demonstrations.

12
Assembly Cut provides a non-destructive way to generate cutaway views
via a single operation.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

12-7

Assemblies

Assembly Cut Characteristics

12

You can select multiple target and tool bodies to create the assembly cut.

Selected bodies are associatively copied into the work part (if they are not
there already), and the tool bodies are subtracted from the target bodies.

Tool bodies can be selected from the work part or from components of
the work part.

Target bodies must be selected from components in the work part.

All the resultant copied bodies and Booleans are presented as a single
Assembly Cut feature in the Part Navigator.

When you select an Assembly Cut feature in the Part Navigator, its target
and tool bodies are shown in the Details panel. You cannot, however, see
or edit the individual features that make up an Assembly Cut feature set.

You can perform multiple cuts on a target body.

Assembly Cut bodies act much like promoted bodies. They hide their
parent bodies from view, and they exist at the assembly level.
Consider using a master model assembly, where one or more cut
features live in a super assembly that references the original
assembly as its only component. This is desirable because you cannot
manage cut feature display by using arrangements.

12-8

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Assemblies

Assembly Cut Notes

You can find out whether any of the Boolean features failed (for example,
because their tool and target bodies did not intersect) by selecting the

12

Assembly Cut feature and choosing InformationFeature, or choose


MB3Information over the assembly cut node in the Part Navigator.

If none of the selected tool and target bodies intersect, you receive a
message, but an Assembly Cut feature is still created.

Deleting an Assembly Cut feature removes all its copied bodies, Booleans,
and downstream features.

Suppressing an Assembly Cut feature suppresses its Booleans, but not


the underlying copied bodies.

If you delete a component involved in an assembly cut, the bodies copied


from the component and their downstream features are also deleted. The
Assembly Cut feature, however, still exists.

If any of the components involved in an assembly cut are unloaded,


updates are based on the tool and target components that are loaded.

If you perform an Open As operation on a component, the Assembly Cut


feature re-maps to the new component, provided the new component is a
version of the original.

If you substitute a component, bodies copied from the component no


longer update using the original bodies.
-

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

12-9

Assemblies

12

Assembly Cut features are updated using the arrangement that was in
effect when the cut was created. (You can see the defining arrangement by
selecting an Assembly Cut feature and choosing InformationFeature.)

If the tool and target bodies were already associatively copied into
the work part when the Cut is created, the location of these bodies is
determined by the arrangement that was in effect when the bodies were
copied.

12-10

Deleting the defining arrangement of an Assembly Cut removes all of the


bodies that were dependent on the arrangement.

If you select any elements of a component array as tools or targets, there


is no associativity to the array template. This means that array members
created after the Assembly Cut feature is created are not automatically
added as tools or targets.

When you are editing an assembly cut, you cannot change a tool body into
a target body (or vice versa). You must delete and recreate the cut.

Design-in-context of cut bodies is not possible, because the cut bodies


prevent the display of the original body. If you want to access the cut
bodies, choose Set Displayed Part.

Target bodies that are completely inside the tool body are not eliminated
during the subtract operation, but they do not cause the failure that
occurs when a target body is completely inside a tool body during most
modeling operations.

It is possible to use an assembly cut in other assembly cuts.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Assemblies

Activity Using Assembly Cut to Make a Cutaway Drawing for the Vise
You want to make a cutaway illustration of the vise assembly showing
the attachment of the jaw plates, the screw and bushing arrangement
of the handle mechanism, and the way the shaft passes through the
moving jaw and attaches to the fixed jaw.
To manage this you will use a higher level assembly that will contain
the cut geometry. This avoids modifying the original
Step 1:

Open cdt_vise_cutawayview and start the Modeling application.


Using the master model concept, this assembly was prepared by
adding a version of the vise assembly as its sole component. If the
model is changed, the drawing in the cutaway view assembly will
be very easy to update.
A sketch is partially constrained to three WAVE linked edges to
define cut locations.

Step 2:

Fit the sketch curves loosely to the vise geometry.


You will drag the sketch to roughly surround the vise
assembly.
Choose EditSketch.
Drag sketch lines to the approximate configuration shown.
The sketch can be extruded without being fully
constrained.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

12-11

12

Assemblies

Choose Finish.
Step 3:

12

Extrude the profile.


Extrude the sketch to the approximate proportions shown:

Step 4:

Create the assembly cut.


Choose the Assembly Cut icon
on the Feature Operations
toolbar or InsertCombine BodiesAssembly Cut.
Ensure that the Blank Tools option is on.

12-12

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Assemblies

Step 5:

Verify in the original assembly that no component has been


modified.
As Target Bodies select:
both jaws
both jaw plates
all four plate screws
the guide
the screw nut
the bushing
the shaft that is cut by the extrusion (far side in the
illustration)
the two shaft nuts that are cut by the extrusion (far side in
the illustration)

Select the Extrusion as the tool body.


Make layer 1 the Work Layer and layer 21 Invisible.
As we mentioned earlier, the two plate screws that
were completely enclosed were not affected by the cut.
Chose InformationFeature and select the assembly cut
feature.
Notice that the two screws that were not cut did indeed
generated a boolean failure. Recall that there was no warning
of this and the cut operation as a whole succeeded.
-

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

12-13

12

Assemblies

Optionally, color some of the cut faces (EditObject Display


and filter for faces) to make them stand out more dramatically
in an illustration, and blank the two uncut screws.

12

Step 6:

12-14

Close all parts.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Assemblies

Assembly Arrangements Enhancements


In NX 4, you can suppress components on an arrangement by arrangement
basis.
You can have arrangement specific mating conditions within an assembly.
Components can be suppressed in some arrangements and not in others. This
lets you control components positions and visibility in each arrangement.
You can also use sequences to show animation of arrangements.
Options for this new functionality are located in several places:

In the Assembly Navigator use MB3 Include Suppressed Components.

It will be possible for different components of the same instance to have


different suppression states.

In the Assembly Navigator use MB3PropertiesColumns, (or


Columns and select the desired columns) to include Suppression Control
and Position Control columns in the window.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

12-15

12

Assemblies

Two new Assembly Navigator columns, Position Control and Suppression


Control, are displayed at the highest level parent in the displayed
assembly.

12
From the main menu pull-down, choose Assemblies
ComponentsEdit
Suppression State.

12-16

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Assemblies

The Assembly Arrangements Dialog

12
Use works like selecting on the arrangement name - it
displays that arrangement in the view.
Copy duplicates the selected arrangement.
Rename lets you rename the selected arrangement.
Information opens the window that contains information
about the selected arrangement.
Set as Default lets you set the selected arrangement as
your default.
Delete removes the selected arrangement from the part.
Properties lets you edit properties of an arrangement.
New Arrangement creates a new arrangement and adds
it to the arrangements list box, where you can change its
default name.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

12-17

Assemblies

Suppressing/Unsuppressing Components in Arrangements


In NX 4 you can suppress components in arrangements to show variants of
the same subassembly (each with different components excluded) by using
occurrence suppression. You can set the suppression state of any individual

12

component independently of any other component (even within an instance).


Suppressed components in an arrangement will also be suppressed in all
exploded views based off that arrangement.
You can suppress components by parents in an assembly at any level i.e.
not just by their direct parent. You can choose what parent of the selected
component should control its suppression state and then set the suppression
state in all arrangements or any selection of arrangements.
You can also control the suppression state by expression.
AssembliesReportsList Components will identify a component
as suppressed or unsuppressed in the current arrangement.
For NX 4, Component Suppression has its own interaction and is removed
from the component properties parameters page.
There are several ways to suppress components.
1. Within the Assembly Navigator, you can choose MB3Suppression
over the node of the component you want to suppress. The Suppression
dialog displays the existing arrangements and suppression states of that
component in each arrangement. You can then suppress the component
for any or all arrangements.
2. You can choose the Suppress Component icon
on the Assemblies
toolbar, or choose the menu option
AssembliesComponentsSuppress Component. The Class Selection
dialog lets you make your component selections. Then, the Suppression
dialog displays all arrangements, and you can specify the arrangement(s)
in which the component suppression should occur. You can
suppress/unsuppress individual component occurrences.
3. You can use AssembliesComponentsEdit Suppression State. The
Class Selection dialog lets you make your component selections. Then,
the Suppression dialog displays all arrangements and you can specify the
arrangement(s) in which the component suppression should occur.

12-18

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Assemblies

The Unsuppress Component icon


, or the menu option
AssembliesComponentsUnsuppress Component lets you
select suppressed components to unsuppress.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

12

12-19

Assemblies

Suppressing Mating Constraints


In NX 4, you have additional MB3 pop-up menu options from within the
Mating Constraints window listing: Suppress All Constraints, Suppress
Mating Condition, and Information.

12

If you try to unsuppress a constraint, as for example the one shown below,
you will receive a warning message.

Notice the double-box icon


(yellow and
white with red check) that indicates that the mating constraint is
arrangement specific.
If you choose the Show Error Description option on the message, an
information window displays that tells you what is going on, and provides
hints to fix the constraint.

12-20

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Assemblies

InformationObject will show the state of the current component


(i.e., suppress, and unsuppressed).
The Mass Properties calculation is based upon suppression states
given by the active arrangement of the work part. The name of the
arrangement of the work part, for which calculations are taking
place, is displayed.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

12-21

Assemblies

Activity Arrangements
In this activity, you will suppress mating conditions on components
within different arrangements to demonstrate different configurations
of the assembly.

12

Step 1:

Use Load Options to set Partial Loading to off.

Step 2:

Open the cdt_blender_inlet_fixture-03_ASSM.prt assembly part


and start the Assemblies application.

Step 3:

Save As this assembly into your own student folder with the name
XXX_blender_inlet_fixture-03_ASSM.

Step 4:

Set up an Arrangements column in the Assembly Navigator.


Open the Assembly Navigator
In the navigator, use MB3ColumnsConfigure. Turn the
Arrangements option to on and move it to second place from
the top, just below Descriptive Part Name.

12-22

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Assemblies

Step 5:

Define a new arrangement.


Within the Assembly Navigator, place your cursor on the top
level assembly name then use MB3ArrangementsEdit.

12
The Assembly Arrangements dialog is displayed.

Use Copy
to create a new arrangement. With
Arrangement 2 still highlighted, rename it to UNLOADED.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

12-23

Assemblies

Step 6:

Establish the UNLOADED arrangement as the arrangement in


use.
Double click on the name UNLOADED. The green checkmark
should appear beside the name to verify that it is the
arrangement currently being used and modified.

12

Close to end this step. Note:

The name UNLOADED appears in the Assembly


Navigator beside the name of the assembly, and that
packing is unique for each arrangement.

12-24

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Assemblies

Step 7:

Edit the suppression states of components within the UNLOADED


arrangement.
Choose the Edit Suppression State icon
on the
Assemblies toolbar or choose AssembliesComponentsEdit
Suppression State.
From the Assembly Navigator, select the PART component as
shown.

As you select names from the list, they also highlight in the
graphics area.
Complete this step by picking the green checkmark.
The Suppression dialog appears.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

12-25

12

Assemblies

Insure that UNLOADED is highlighted, then set Always


Suppressed to on, then OK.

12

The part is suppressed in the assembly.

12-26

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Assemblies

Step 8:

Suppress specific constraints, so that the clamps can be turned.


To turn the clampstraps out of the way, will require that some
of the mating constraints will need to be manipulated, but only
within the context of this specific arrangement.
That way, the clamps can be repositioned, and not be in conflict
with the constraints that currently align them.
With the assembly as the work part, choose the Mate
Component icon

on the Assemblies toolbar.

You will see that the mating conditions for each of the
clampstraps, washers, and hex nuts have already been
renamed, to make it easier to find them.

Clampstrap 1, Washer 1, and Hexnut 1 are


located on the right side of the fixture.
The 2 set are located on the bottom left
corner of the fixture.
The 3 set are on the top left corner of the
fixture.

Expand the CLAMPSTRAP 1 mating condition.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

12-27

12

Assemblies

With the cursor over the Parallel constraint, choose


MB3Arrangement Specific.

12
Take careful notice that the icon in front of the Parallel
constraint has now changed.

Click on that icon, to suppress that mating constraint, but


only in the context of this arrangement. The red checkmark
disappears.

Complete by picking Apply and then Cancel.

12-28

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Assemblies

Step 9:

Rotate the Clampstrap 1 component.


Choose the Reposition Component icon
Assemblies toolbar.

from the

Select the Clampstrap 1 component from the graphics screen,


confirm with Quickpick, and OK.
Using the dynamic positioning handles, rotate the clamp 90
degrees.

Complete this with OK.


Step 10: Repeat the above Arrangement Specific suppress procedure to
suppress the constraints within the UNLOADED arrangement,
for the other two clamps.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

12-29

12

Assemblies

Step 11: Repeat the above Reposition procedure to rotate the other two
clamps.

12

Step 12: Save your file.


Step 13: Define a new arrangement named PART LOADED.
Within the Assembly Navigator, place your cursor on the top
level assembly name then use MB3ArrangementsEdit.

Copy the UNLOADED arrangement


to create a new
arrangement. With UNLOADED 2 still highlighted, rename it
to PART LOADED.

12-30

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Assemblies

Double click on the PART LOADED name, so that it becomes


the arrangement in use.

12
Close the Assembly Arrangements dialog.
Step 14: Unsuppress the PART component within a single arrangement,
PART LOADED.
Activate Arrangement 1 from the Assembly Navigator. You
need to activate this arrangement, in order to see the desired
component.

Choose the Edit Suppression State icon


on the
Assemblies toolbar or choose AssembliesComponentsEdit
Suppression State.
Select the PART component, confirm with Quickpick, and OK.
Insure that PART LOADED is highlighted, then set Never
Suppressed to on, and OK.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

12-31

Assemblies

From the assembly navigator, display the PART LOADED


arrangement.

12

Step 15: Define a final arrangement, with the part in place and the clamps
turned correctly.
With the cursor on the assembly part name in the assembly
navigator, MB3ArrangementsEdit.
In the Assembly Arrangements dialog, Copy
1 to create a new arrangement.

Arrangement

Rename it to PART CLAMPED.


Close the Assembly Arrangements dialog.
Step 16: Save your file.
Step 17: Display the various arrangements.
From the assembly navigator, change the arrangement being
displayed to UNLOADED.
Change the arrangement displayed to PART LOADED.
Change the display to the arrangement PART CLAMPED.
Step 18: Save and Close this assembly.

12-32

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Summary
In this lesson you:

created a new parent assembly

learned about the enhancements to reference sets

learned how to use Assembly Cut

became familiar with the enhancements to Assembly Arrangements

12

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

12-51

12

Lesson

13 Drafting Part 1
13

Purpose
This lesson will familiarize you with what is new in the NX 4 Drafting
application.
Objectives
After you complete this section of the lesson you will be able to:

Create a "base" view of a part using the cursor and MB3 pop-up menus.

Immediately create a projected view after the base view has been
established.

Chose a "preview" style to check the appearance of any new view.

Define a specific distance for any projected view.

Use the Part Navigator to add a base view.

Add a view with a defined amount of perspective to a drawing sheet.

Add a detail view or auxiliary view using the View Creation Options bar.

Create a base view of an angled face using the Preview Window.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

13-1

Drafting Part 1

Adding Views to Drawing Sheets


The first view to add to a drawing is the Base View. A base view may be
initiated through the Part Navigator or by MB3 on the Drawing border.
Procedure: Starting a base view with the Part Navigator

13

In the Part Navigator, select a drawing sheet node with MB3.

From the pop-up menu choose Add Base View.

Set the View Creation Option Bar as desired and place view.

Procedure: Starting a base view with MB3 on the Drawing Border

In the graphic window, place the cursor over the dashed line that
represents the drawing border; click MB3.

From the pop-up menu choose Add Base View.

Set the View Creation Option Bar as desired and place view.
Add Base View is the default option (bold) in the pop-up menu. So,
the base view can be added simply by selecting the drawing border.

13-2

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Drafting Part 1

View Creation Options Bar


After choosing Add Base View the View Creations Option Bar appears in the
upper left corner of the graphic screen.

13

The following options are available (left to right) on the tool bar:
Style, View, Scale, Orient View Tool, and Move View.
Style (1) option provides the same set of parameters as the View Preferences
option. However, when these options are set from this toolbar they are specific
to the view that is being placed on the drawing.
View (2) option determines the orientation of the base view. A pull-down
menu list the canned views and any custom views that have been created.
Scale (3) option provides a means to set the scale of the base view. A pull-down
menu list several preset scales as well as the options to enter a custom scale
or define the scale by an expression.
Orient View Tool (4) option provides a means to orient a view to a orientation
that is not listed in the View pull-down menu.
Move View (5) option only appears on the toolbar if there is already a view
on the drawing. The purpose of this option is to allow you to move existing
views during the operation of adding a new view.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

13-3

Drafting Part 1

Orient View Tool When the Orient View Tool is selected a preview screen is
presented along with several options to orient the model as desired.

13

When you have an assembly, you can use the Hide Component and Show
Component icons to choose what components you want to have displayed
on the drawing sheet.
1 Rotation Tool
4 Associative
Orientation

13-4

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

2 View Plane Tool


5 Reset

3 Horizontal Direction
6 Reverse Direction

mt10026_g NX 4

Drafting Part 1

View Display
You can display views as wireframe or shaded images.

Choose PreferencesDrafting and choose the Preview tab.


There are four types of views you can choose:

Border (just the border of the view)

13

Wireframe
Hidden Wireframe
Shaded

In the View section of the page, set the Style option to Wireframe.

You can also change the preview by choosing MB3Preview Style.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

13-5

Drafting Part 1

MB3 Options
Explore new MB3 options available on view border.
Move the cursor over an existing view so that it is displayed pre-highlighted,
then click MB3
You can see that the number of choices has been increased. Many will let
you create a specific type of projected view. (These are also available on the
toolbar and in the Part Navigator pop-up menu.)

13

Notice that you can update an out-of-date view with this menu.
Explore new MB3 options available on drawing sheet border.
Use the Part Navigator to open drawing sheet SH2.

13-6

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Drafting Part 1

Place the cursor on the dashed border of the drawing sheet (so that it
pre-highlights), then click MB3.
Among the various options, Add Base View is bold. So you could just select
the border of the drawing sheet to launch the "add base view" procedure.

13

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

13-7

Drafting Part 1

Procedure: Adding Perspective Views on Drawings


You can add a perspective view to the drawing sheet.

13

On the View Creation Options bar, choose the isometric view.

Use the scale drop down menu to choose scale size.

Choose the Style icon to display the View Style dialog for this view.

Choose the Perspective tab. Turn on the Perspective option, then key
in a Distance value.

OK the dialog, indicate a good location in the center of the drawing sheet
for the view, then click MB2 to get out of the view creation procedure.
You can add perspective to any view on the drawing. To do this you
would:
Double-click the border of the view to display the View Style
dialog for that view.
Display the Perspective tab page.
Turn on the Perspective option.
Key in the Distance value you need.
OK the dialog.

13-8

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Drafting Part 1

Creating Detail Views


To create a Detail view in NX 4:

Open drawing sheet.

Place the cursor over the border of an existing view, then choose
MB3Add Detail View.
The View Creation Options bar presents icons that will help you create

13

the type of detail view you need.


The Style icon will let you display the View Style dialog for
this particular view.
You can use the Scale drop down menu to choose a preset scale.
You can toggle between the Rectangular Boundary and
Circular Boundary styles.

You can use the Label Style drop down menu (with Circular
Boundary option) to choose the letter style you need
(Embedded, Label, Note, and so on).
When you have an assembly, you can use the Hide Component
and Show Component icons to choose what components you
want to have displayed on the drawing sheet.
When you have an assembly you can switch between not
sectioning components (like screws and rivets) or sectioning
them using the Non-sectioned Component or Sectioned
Component icons.
You can use the Move View icon to immediately move the view
to another location on the same drawing sheet or a different
drawing sheet.

Select a boundary, the Circular Boundary icon for instance.

Choose the origin of the detail view, select any available point.

Indicate a size for the circular boundary.


The default scale for detail views is 2:1.
You could use the Scale drop-down menu to change the scale before you
established the view on the drawing sheet.
-

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

13-9

Drafting Part 1

Indicate a good location for the detail view near its parent.

Press the Escape key (or click MB2) to get out of the view creation
procedure.

13

13-10

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Drafting Part 1

Procedure: Creating a True View Auxiliary View

13

Auxiliary views are created much like detail views, except that you need
to define a hinge line.
To create an auxiliary view:

Open a drawing sheet.

Choose the Add Projected View icon


(or use one of the MB3 methods).

on the Drawing Layout toolbar

This time the View Creation Options bar is a little different.


The Style icon will let you display the View Style dialog for this
particular view.
You can use the Hinge Line icon to define an exact angle of the
hinge line on the parent view.
You can use the Vector Constructor icon to define the vector you
would like to use.
You can use the Reverse Direction icon to change the projection
of the view.
When you have an assembly, you can use the Hide Component
and Show Component icons to choose what components you want
to have displayed on the drawing sheet.
When you have an assembly you can switch between not
sectioning components (like screws and rivets) or sectioning them
using the Non-sectioned Component or Sectioned Component
icons.
You can use the Move View icon to immediately move the view
to another location on the same drawing sheet or a different
drawing sheet.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

13-11

Drafting Part 1

Define the hinge line for the auxiliary view.


Choose the Hinge Line icon on the bar.

Define a vector. It is set to Inferred Vector.

13

Define the vector direction. If you need to, choose the Reverse Direction
icon on the bar to change the direction of the arrow.
Youll notice that you can place the view anywhere, but when it is
perpendicular to the hinge line, youll get a dashed line to the view.

13-12

Indicate a good location relative to the parent view, then click MB2 to
end the procedure.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Drafting Part 1

You can then preview using a shaded image.

Choose PreferencesDrafting.
On the Preview tab page, set Style to Shaded, then OK the dialog.

13

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

13-13

Drafting Part 1

Activity Adding Views to a Drawing


This activity will guide you through the steps of adding a base view,
projecting views, editing views, and creating a simple section.
Step 1:

Open the cdt_bearing_mount part and start the Drafting


application.

Step 2:

Turn off the drawing grid.


Open the Part Navigator.

13

Click MB3 on the Drawing node and choose Grid.


Step 3:

Add a Base View.


Place the cursor over the edge of the drawing border and
double-click.
The View Creations Option Bar appears and the top view is
selected by default. You will use this view for the base view.
Click MB3 and choose Preview StyleWireframe.
Choose the Style icon

in the View Creations Option Bar.

Choose the General tab.


Verify that Centerlines is checked and key in a scale of .5.

13-14

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Drafting Part 1

Choose the Hidden Lines tab.


Verify that Hidden Line is checked and the font is set to
Invisible.

13
Choose OK.
Locate the view in the upper left corner of the drawing by
clicking MB1.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

13-15

Drafting Part 1

Step 4:

Project a Front view.


Move the cursor straight below the base view so that the
alignment line is vertical.
Locate the view in the bottom left corner of the drawing by
clicking MB1.

13

Press Escape to exit the projection function.


Step 5:

Project a Right view off the Front view.


Place the cursor over the Front views border; it becomes
highlighted.
Click MB3 and choose Add Projected View.
Move the cursor to the right of the Front view so that the
alignment line is horizontal.

13-16

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Drafting Part 1

Locate the view in the bottom right corner of the drawing by


clicking MB1.

13

Press Escape.
Step 6:

Project an auxiliary view.


Place the cursor over the Right views border.
Click MB3 and choose Add Projected View.
Move the cursor around the Right view from the 12:00 to the
9:00 position.
Notice that approximately at the 10:00 position that a face in
the Top and Front views highlight as well as the corresponding
edge in the Right view. If you select a location with these faces
highlighted you will create a true auxiliary view of that face.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

13-17

Drafting Part 1

Select a location as shown below.

13
In some cases you will have to define a hinge line for the
auxiliary view. You will now delete the view and recreate it
by defining a hinge line.
Press Escape.
Place the cursor over the auxiliary views border and click
MB3; choose Delete.
Click MB3 on the right views border and choose
Add Projected View.
Choose Hinge Line

from the View Creations Option Bar.

Select the edge, in the Right view, shown below.

Move the cursor around in the drawing. Notice how the


projection remains unchanged.

13-18

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Drafting Part 1

Make sure that the projection vector in the


Right view is pointing toward the center of the
drawing.
Use the Reverse Direction icon
Option Bar as required.

on the View Creations

Locate the Auxiliary view using the alignment line.

13
Click MB2 to exit.
Step 7:

Create a simple section view.


Click MB3 on the Top views border and choose
Add Section View.
Choose the Style icon

in the Option Bar.

Choose the General tab and toggle off Centerlines.


Choose OK.
In the Snap Point toolbar, toggle off all icons except Arc Center.
Define the cut position by selecting the edge shown below.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

13-19

Drafting Part 1

Move the cursor to the right of the Top view and locate the
section view.

13
Press Escape to exit.
Step 8:

Change the scale of the section view.


Click MB3 on the Section views border and choose Style.
Choose the General tab.
Change the scale to 1 and choose OK.

Step 9:

Move the Section view.


Place the cursor over the Section views border. Hold MB1 down
and drag the view to the upper right corner of the drawing. Do
not be concerned with the alignment lines if they appear.

13-20

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Drafting Part 1

Step 10: Add Automatic Center lines to the Section view.


Choose InsertSymbolUtility Symbol.
Choose Automatic Centerline.
Select the Section view in the drawing; the border highlights.
Choose Apply.

13

Choose Cancel.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

13-21

Drafting Part 1

Step 11: Create a projected view using the Offset Dynamic Input Box.
Place the cursor over the Top views border; click MB3 and
choose Add Projected View.
Click MB3 and toggle on Cursor Tracking; the Offset Dynamic
Input box appears.
Move the cursor to the right of the Top view so that the
alignment line is horizontal.
Notice that the Offset value is presently highlighted.

13

Key in 10 and press Enter.


Move the cursor around the Top view.
Notice how the location is constrained to a distance of 10.
Locate the new view to right of the Top view.

Press Escape.
Step 12: Close the part.

13-22

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Drafting Part 1

Activity Using the Orient View Tool


In this activity you will create a base view using the Orient View Tool
so that an oblique face will appear true size in a drawing.
Step 1:

Open the cdt_orient_view part.


Inspect the part visually. Notice the triangular face with the 3
holes. This face needs to be oriented parallel to the drawing.

Step 2:

Start the Drafting application.


An A size drawing has already been prepared for you.

Step 3:

Add a Base View.

13

Doubleclick on the drawing border.


Choose the Orient View Tool icon
Option Bar.

from the View Creations

The Orient View window appears.

Step 4:

Define the view plane.


By default the CUE line is prompting you to select a face to define
the view plane and that is how we will proceed in this step.
A view plane may also be defined by using the View Plane Tool
which invokes the Plane Constructor dialog.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

13-23

Drafting Part 1

Place the cursor in the Orient View window, hold MB2 down
and rotate the part to get a better visual perspective.
In the Orient View window, click MB3 and choose Fit.
The options in the View toolbar can be applied in the
Orient View window.
Select the triangular face to define the view plane and confirm
if necessary.
The part immediately rotates to the new orientation. The view
orientation is derived from the direction of the selected faces
normal. If desired the direction of the normal can be reversed.

13

13-24

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Drafting Part 1

Choose Reverse Direction


the normal is pointing.

to change the direction that

13

Now the normal points into the drawing. If you were to place
the view on the drawing now and make hidden lines invisible,
the triangular face would not appear.
Choose Reverse Direction again so that the triangular face
is closest to you.
Step 5:

Define the horizontal direction.


So far the plane of the view has been defined by a face. However,
the orientation of the face, that is, the top, bottom, right, and left
sides of the face have not been defined; this will be accomplished by
defining a horizontal direction. For this view we want the
counterbored hole to be in the upper right position of the triangular
face.
Choose Horizontal Direction Tool.
A horizontal direction may be defined with an edge, face, or
the Vector Constructor. If an edge is used the direction of the
vector is determined by which end of the edge is selected. If a
face is used the direction is determined by the face normal.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

13-25

Drafting Part 1

Select the edge on the end as shown below.

13
Click MB2 or choose OK.

The view is now in the desired orientation.


If you wanted to return the view to its original orientation, you
would use the Reset icon.
Choose Reset.

13-26

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Drafting Part 1

Step 6:

Return the view to the previous orientation.


Press Escape.
Choose Orient View Tool.
Select the triangular face.

13

Choose Horizontal Direction Tool.


Select the edge on the end as shown below.

Click MB2 and then choose MB3Fit.


Notice that by default the Associative Orientation icon
is
on. By having this toggled on, once the view has been placed
on the drawing, the view will update if the orientation of the
face that defines the view plane changes.
Click MB2 to accept the orientation.
Locate the view in the center of the drawing.
Press Escape to exit.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

13-27

Drafting Part 1

Step 7:

Change the orientation of the triangular face.


Start the Modeling application.
Choose ToolsExpression.
Select the Angle expression. If necessary, set the Listed
Expressions filter to Named.
In the Formula text field, key in a new value of 70 and choose
OK.

13

Return to the Drafting application.


Notice that the drawing is OUT-OF-DATE and that the
triangular face is no longer parallel to the drawing. This is
evident by two things; the top edge is no longer horizontal and
the edges of the counterbore hole do not appear concentric.
Choose Update Views.
Choose OK; the view updates.

Step 8:

13-28

Close the part.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Drafting Part 1

Creating Section Views


Section views are created very much like a projected view except that you
have more control over the exact placement of the hinge line, its orientation
and other aspects of this type of view.

13
Because of the specific requirements of the different types of sections views,
the system will provide appropriate icons on the View Creation Options bar
depending on which type of section view you need to create.
When you choose the Add Section View to Drawing icon
on the Drawing
Layout toolbar (or use one of the MB3 methods), the View Creation Options
bar is displayed which you can use to create the section view you need.

The options are much the same as you have seen with the exception of the
Section Line Style icon

When you select the parent view, and the hinge line symbol is displayed on
the cursor and some more icons are available on the View Creation bar.
Additional Icons:
The Hinge Line icon will let you define the hinge line at a specific
angle.
The Reverse Direction icon will let you reverse the direction of the
section arrows.
After you define the hinge line a few more option will be available on the
View Creation icon options bar.
The Add Segment icon will let you create cut sections for a stepped
section view.
The Section View Tool will display the Orient View window so that
you can choose an orientation you need.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

13-29

Drafting Part 1

Stepped Section Views


If you needed to create a stepped section view of a part, you would begin just
as you did in creating a simple section view.
You would select the first object you wanted the section line to cut through.
For each of the next cuts you would choose Add Cut from the View Creation
Options bar (or choose MB3Add Segment) and select the object you
wanted the stepped segment of the section line to cut through.

13

Finally, you would finish the section view just as you did in the simple section
view.

13-30

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Drafting Part 1

Activity Creating a Section View


You need to create a section view through the center of the part.

13
You open onto a D size drawing sheet (SH1). There is just the one
top view of the part.
Step 1:

Open the cdt_coupler part.

Step 2:

Start the Drafting application.

Step 3:

Add a section view.


Choose the Add Section View to Drawing icon
on the
Drawing Layout toolbar (or use one of the MB3 methods).
For the parent view, select the top view.

Step 4:

Define the hinge line.


You want the hinge line to be horizontal and to cut through the
center of the part.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

13-31

Drafting Part 1

Move the hinge line symbol around until you highlight the arc
center of the central hole (look for the arc center symbol near
the cursor), then select it.

13
The hinge line is now anchored to the center of the part, but you
can rotate it to any angle around its anchor point.
Step 5:

Place the section view on the drawing.


You want this first section view to show a cut segment that goes
horizontally through the part.
Move the cursor below the top view and keep it within the
orthographic snap angle so that the hinge line remains
horizontal then indicate a good location.

Press Escape (or click MB2) to get out of the procedure.

13-32

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Drafting Part 1

Step 6:

Create a hinge line at an exact angle that goes through the bolt
hole cut outs on the flange of this part.

13

Open drawing sheet SH2.


Like drawing sheet SH1, there is just a top view.
Choose the Section View icon
Options bar.

on the View Creation

Select the top view.


You want to anchor the hinge line to the center of the part.
Select the arc center of the central hole on the part.
Choose the Hinge Line icon
on the icon option bar.
You can infer a vector or use the Vector Constructor (now
available) to use one of the vector defining methods.
Optional: Turn on only the Arc Center icon on the Snap Point
toolbar.
Use the drop down menu on the Vector icon to set it to Two
Points.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

13-33

Drafting Part 1

Select the arc center of these two bolt hole cut outs.

13
Step 7:

Place the view to the lower right of the parent view with the
section line arrows pointing away from the section view

If you need to, select the Reverse Direction icon


on
the icon option bar to change the direction of the section line
arrows. (Do not place the view yet.)
You can check out the section on the part before you establish
the section view on the drawing sheet.
Choose the Section View Tool icon
icon options bar.

on the View Creation

The Section View window appears within the graphics window.


It shows the part with a section plane that cuts through it in
the orientation you defined.
You will be able to see the cut a little better if you display the
part with hidden edges invisible.

13-34

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Drafting Part 1

Set the View option to Hidden Wireframe.

13
Now you can see a little more clearly what the section plane
is cutting.
Choose the Cut icon

at the top of the window.

The image now shows the section cut.

Choose the Close icon at the top right corner of the Section
View window.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

13-35

Drafting Part 1

Step 8:

Place the view on the drawing sheet.


Indicate a good location for the section view.

13

Step 9:

13-36

Close the part.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Drafting Part 1

Views From Other Parts


If you need to, you can add a view to a drawing sheet thats actually from
another part.

13
This method does not use a "hide" or "show" assembly procedure, but actually
brings in a view from a selected part.
This is accomplished by choosing the Part View icon
Layout toolbar (or use one of the MB3 methods).

on the Drawing

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

13-37

Drafting Part 1

Activity Adding a View from Another Part


Step 1:

Open the cdt_bonnet part and start the Drafting application.


This part is used in a valve assembly. It sits on the body of the
valve and keeps the valve stem straight.
You open onto drawing sheet SH1. It has a trimetric view of this
part.

13
You would like to show that a hand wheel sits above this part.

The part that you will want to bring in is called "hand_wheel".

13-38

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Drafting Part 1

Step 2:

Prepare to bring in a view.


Choose the Part View icon

on the Drawing Layout toolbar

(or use one of the MB3 methods).


On the Select Part dialog, choose Choose Part File.
Choose part cdt_hand_wheel, then OK the dialog.

13

An top view of the hand wheel appears on the cursor.


On the View Creation Options bar, set the View field to
TFR-TRI.
Indicate a location for the view of the hand wheel above the
bonnet, then use MB2 to get out of the view creation procedure.
Optional: Move the view of the hand wheel directly over the
view of the bonnet.

Step 3:

Close the part.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

13-39

Drafting Part 1

Displaying Specific Components on Drawing Sheets


Whenever you are developing drawings of assemblies, you often want to
display only selected components on a drawing sheet (for dimensioning,
annotation, and so on).

13
In the past you had to use the Assembly application procedures to do this
after the view had been placed on the drawing. But now you can make these
choices without leaving the Drafting application.
This is accomplished by choosing Hide Component on the View Creation
Options bar.

13-40

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Drafting Part 1

Activity Displaying Components on Drawing Sheets


In this activity, you will display specified assembly components onto a
drawing sheet.
You can open a master model drawing of the gate valve assembly.
Step 1:

Open the gate_valve_dwg part from the gate_valve_asmb


directory.
The assembly consists of all the components that are required for
this gate valve.

Step 2:

Start the Drafting application.


You open onto a size A0 metric drawing sheet (SH1). The scale for
the drawings sheet has been set to 3/4 full size.

Step 3:

Choose the Add Base View icon


toolbar.

on the Drawing Layout

Notice that the scale for this view is automatically set to 0.75
because of the scale setting on the Drawing Sheet dialog.
Notice, too, that you get a Custom Scale (pencil and equal sign)
icon on the View Creation bar.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

13-41

13

Drafting Part 1

Place a TFR-TRI "base view" on the left side of the drawing


sheet (and click MB2 to get out of the procedure).

13
Step 4:

Hide the hand wheel component in a front view.

Choose the Add Base View icon


toolbar.

on the Drawing Layout

Set the view to a FRONT view.


Choose Hide Component on the View Creation Options bar

13-42

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Drafting Part 1

Select the hand wheel component from the trimetric view.

13
OK the selection.
Indicate a good location for the front view in the center of the
drawing sheet, then use MB2 to get out of the view creation
procedures.
The view is established on the drawing but the wheel is not
displayed.

To remove a component from an existing view or add


a component to it, you would need to use the regular
Assembly procedures.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

13-43

Drafting Part 1

Step 5:

Create a right view of this part without the hand wheel or the
body of the valve using the Part Navigator.

13
Detach the Assembly Navigator and display it in a convenient
location.
Choose the Add Base View icon
toolbar.

on the Drawing Layout

Set the view to a Right view.


Choose Hide Component on the View Creation Options bar
Use Ctrl-Select to choose just the valve body
(1001-1_valve_body) and the hand wheel
(5039-3-100_hand_wheel) from the Part Navigator.

Notice that these components are also highlighted in all the


views.
Use the View Creation bar to OK the dialog.

13-44

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Drafting Part 1

Indicate a good location for the right view on the right side of
the drawing sheet, and click MB2.

13
If there were a hidden (blanked) component, you would get a
Display Component icon on the View Creation bar. You could use it
to create a view on the drawing sheet that displayed the blanked
component.
Step 6:

Close the part.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

13-45

Drafting Part 1

Procedure: Displaying Arrangements of Assemblies


If you have several arrangements of an assembly, you can choose the one
you want to show on a drawing sheet.

13

13-46

Choose the Add Base View icon

Before you placed the view, you would choose MB3Style, then
choose the Base tab.

Turn the Load option on, choose the Browse option, then select an
assembly arrangement part.

From the Arrangement pull-down menu, you would choose the name of
the arrangement you wanted to display in the view.

OK the View Style dialog, and place the view on the drawing sheet.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Drafting Part 1

Inspection and Reference Dimensions


There are two new types of dimensions you can create:

an inspection dimension (in a rounded rectangle, with or without a


tolerance).

a reference dimension (in parentheses with a tolerance).

13
In previous releases, you could create a "reference" dimension but not with
a tolerance.
To accomplish this click the Inspection icon to turn it on.

Combining Inspection and Reference Dimensions


You can combine both inspection and reference types within one dimension.
To do this, turn both the Reference (Include Tolerance) and Inspection icons
on.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

13-47

Drafting Part 1

Drawing Sheets With Raster Images


You are now able to plot a drawing that has a raster image on it.

The images are added as TIFF, JPG, or PNG files.

13

13-48

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Drafting Part 1

Summary
In this lesson you:

Familiarized yourself with the new view creation methods for all types
of views.

Learned how to add a view that comes from a different part to a drawing
sheet.

Learned how to hide components in a view of an assembly.

Familiarized yourself with inspection and reference dimensions.

Discussed how to add raster images to drawing sheets.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

13-49

13

Lesson

14 Drafting Part 2
Purpose
To introduce additional changes to the Drafting application in NX 4.
Objectives

14

In this section, you will learn about the following changes in NX 4:

create a sketch in drawing view

create a datum on a centerline utility symbol and the new Datum


Extension Line Control

use the new reassociate leader lines functionality

quickly create simple GD&T symbols

create ordinate dimensions using the redesigned ordinate dimensions


interface

display an assembly arrangement in a base drawing view

add tracelines to exploded assembly views

create a standalone section line symbol

create non-associative and empty drawing view

create angled centerline symbols in auxiliary views

apply a thickness and radius of curvature dimension

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

14-1

Drafting Part 2

Sketch in Drawing Member View


This function lets you create a sketch in a drawing view, such as a detail view,
section view, or any other member view of a drawing.

14

Points of interest with sketch in member view:

14-2

you can reference geometry from within drawing member views without
expanding the member views

sketches are created as view dependent in a selected drawing view

drafting sketch names are derived from the member view or drawing
sheet in which they reside

the Retain Dimensions option is on by default for drafting sketches

if you move the member view, the associated sketch will move along with it

if you move the view to another drawing sheet, the sketch will also move
along with it

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Drafting Part 2

Activity - Creating a Sketch in Drawing View


Step 1:

Prepare to create a sketch.


Open the shaft part and make sure the Drafting application
is running.

14

The drawing sheet contains a top view, side view, and circular
detail view.
Zoom in on the circular detail view.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

14-3

Drafting Part 2

Step 2:

Create a diamond shaped sketch on the view.


Choose Insert Sketch.

Select the circular detail view and choose OK


the sketcher.

to start

You can see that you are currently in the sketcher and the drawing
view did not have to be expanded, as in previous versions of NX.
The sketch is associated to this drawing view.
Create the four sketch curves as shown below then terminate
the operation.

14

Selecting the Profile icon


the lines in the String Mode.

14-4

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

will enable you to create

mt10026_g NX 4

Drafting Part 2

Step 3:

Add constraints to the sketch. Apply an Equal Length constraint


on all four lines and a Dimensional constraint on one of the lines.
Choose the Constraints icon

or InsertConstraints.

Select the four lines you just created then choose Equal Length.

You can see that the sketch curves are partially constrained.

14
Create a Dimensional constraint with a value of 14 as shown
below.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

14-5

Drafting Part 2

Step 4:

Complete the sketch by changing the sketch preferences.


Choose Preferences Sketch.
The Retain Dimensions option is on by default. In this activity you
will turn this off, because the curves that you created are going to
be used as a view boundary and do not need to be dimensioned.
Turn the Retain Dimensions option off.
Choose OK.
Choose the Finish Sketch icon

or press Ctrl-Q.

14

Step 5:

14-6

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

Close all parts.

mt10026_g NX 4

Drafting Part 2

Detail/Parent View Enhancements


There are enhancements to both Detail and Parent view capabilities:

Detail view boundary enhancements where you display a


user defined boundary in the parent view from the detail view.

14

Two new Parent View detail labeling positioning options have been added
to the View Label Preferences dialog.

Text After Stub

Text Above Stub

These allow you to specify the position of the detail views label text in the
parent view relative to its leader stub. Look for these two options under
Preferences View Label Detail.

In addition, the L value inside of Preferences Annotation


Line/Arrow lets you adjust the gap distance between the stub and the label
text when Text Above Stub is used.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

14-7

Drafting Part 2

Datum on Centerlines
You can now attach a Datum Leader to centerlines.

14

The following types of centerlines can be selected.

14-8

Linear

Cylindrical

Block

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Drafting Part 2

Datum Extension Line Control


The datum extension line control lets you create standard compliant or
company compliant datum feature symbols attached to an extension line.

The K value under Preferences Annotation Line/Arrow can be


used to control the size of the extension line beyond the datum arrowhead.
This control allows you to produce standard compliant drawings.

This parameter is automatically applied to all datum feature symbols

created in the part.


The default size is extracted from the customer defaults. Preferences and
Style tools can be used to modify existing data.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

14-9

14

Drafting Part 2

Reassociate Leader Lines


This is a new tool that lets you change leader associativity for any of the
annotation objects using standard menu selection. This can easily be applied
using the MB3 pop-up menu.

Type of leader associativity for annotation objects:

14

14-10

Move along the current edge. (MB3 interface)

Redefine a new edge. (MB3 interface)

Redefine a new dimensional object. (New MB3 interface)

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Drafting Part 2

Activity - Selecting and Editing a Leader


Step 1:

Open the shaft_4 part and make sure the Drafting application
is running.

Step 2:

Edit leader lines.


Zoom in on the top left view of the drawing.

14
Select the leader of the top label. Over the same leader line
that you just selected, use MB3 Edit Associativity.

Move your cursor along the outside circular edge.


Notice that the leader follows the edge.
Move your cursor along the next circular edge.
Notice that the leader jumps to the new edge.
Move your cursor to the outside edge of one of the 6 small holes,
then select the hole.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

14-11

Drafting Part 2

Select the leader of the diameter dimension. Over the same


leader line that you just selected, use MB3 Edit Associativity.
Notice that something different happened - the Edit Object
Associativity dialog appeared and the bolt hole circle highlighted
(not an edge).
Move your cursor to the outside edge of one of the 6 small holes.
Select the hole.
You may have to use the QuickPick indicator to select the
edge of the hole.

14

Cancel the Edit Object Associativity dialog.


Notice that the dimension updated to the diameter value.
Step 3:

14-12

Close all parts.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Drafting Part 2

New Interface for Simple GD&T Creation


In addition to the existing GD&T tools inside the Annotation Editor, there
is now a new user interface available for quickly creating GD&T symbols
in Drafting.

The Feature Control Frame Builder:

is easy to use

can be used to edit existing GD&T callouts

has no GD&T rules checking

Pull-down Selection.

Datum letters can also be typed in. For example: M or D-F.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

14-13

Drafting Part 2

Feature Control Frame Manipulation


1. Current frame number
2. Delete the current frame
3. Move the current frame up
4. Move the current frame down
5. Control character text input field
6. Restore Feature Control Frame
Reference

14

Composite Frame

MB3 During Creation

Annotation Placement During Creation

14-14

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Drafting Part 2

Activity - Using the Feature Control Frame Builder


You are going to create a feature control frame and attach it with a leader line.
Step 1:

Open the shaft_5 part in the Drafting application.

Step 2:

Create a feature control frame.


Zoom in on the top left view of the drawing.

14

Choose the Feature Control Frame icon

or Insert

Feature Control Frame.


Using the pull-down functions, create the following feature
control frame.

You will need to manually type in the tolerance value of


0.05 in the Tolerance field.
The Feature Control Frame Builder should look like the figure
below.

You are ready to place the feature control frame on the drawing.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

14-15

Drafting Part 2

Step 3:

Place the Feature Control Frame (FCF).


Click and drag on the bearing surface and place as shown
below to attach the FCF to the edge.

Step 4:

Create a FCF and attach it to a dimension.

14

Use the pull-down functions to create the following feature


control frame.

The Feature Control Frame Builder should look like:

Step 5:

Attach the FCF to the dimension.


On the Annotation Placement toolbar, change the alignment to
Top-Left.

This will set up the point on the feature control frame to align to.
On the Annotation Placement toolbar, choose the Origin Tool
icon.

14-16

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Drafting Part 2

You need to set up the origin of the dimension (Bottom-Left) in


relation to the FCF and then establish the type of association
(Offset Character). Finally, the most important step is to toggle on
the Associative function.
Choose the Offset Character icon
dialog.

on the Origin Tool

Change the Alignment to Bottom-Left.


This will set up the alignment point on the dimension that you
are going to offset from.
Key in 0 in the X Scale Factor field.

14

Key in -1 in the Y Scale Factor field.


Turn the Associative option on.
Select the hole dimension.

Press the Escape key.


Move the hole dimension and see if the FCF follows.
To edit an existing GD&T callout, simply double click it.
This will populate the Feature Control Frame Builder with
the text from the selected symbol. You can then edit the
symbol text as needed.
If nothing happens when you double click a symbol, close
the FCF Builder, then double click the symbol again. This
will open the editor from which the symbol was created.
Step 6:

Close the part.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

14-17

Drafting Part 2

Streamlined Ordinate Dimensions


A redesigned Ordinate Dimension Tool provides a new style of generating
ordinate dimensions. Many of the steps required to create ordinate
dimensions can now be applied using the MB3 pop-up menu.

14
The new Ordinate Dimension Tool:

14-18

is easy to use

has increased functionality and capability

provides display styles in accordance with ANSI, ISO, BS308, JIS

allows user-defined direction of measurement

improves dogleg functionality and capability

has full margin support for both multiple and dynamic margins

allows automatic creation using type, size and selection criterion

lets you re-specify the origin location the ordinate dimensions are
associative

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Drafting Part 2

Activity - Using the Enhanced Ordinate Dimension Tool


In this activity, you will:

create a new ordinate dimension origin


create new ordinate dimension margins
create a new ordinate dimension
change the ordinate dimension preferences
dynamically add and edit doglegs

Step 1:

Open the ordinate part and make sure the Drafting application
is running.

14

This part is a lower die plate used in a progressive die to create


sheet metal parts. It contains a number of features that are ideal
for ordinate dimensions.
Step 2:

Choose the Ordinate Dimension icon

or Insert

Dimension Ordinate.
Step 3:

Create an origin for the ordinate dimensions on the bottom left


hand corner of the die plate.
There is a 45 Degree chamfer on the corner of this die
plate. You need to use the Two Pick Intersection to define
the corner point.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

14-19

Drafting Part 2

Choose the Two Pick Intersection icon


toolbar.

on the Snap Point

Select the bottom edge and the left edge of the die plate.

14
Once the corner point is established the origin is defined and
named ORDINATE1. This can be renamed to meet your company
standards.
Step 4:

Define your margins.


Choose the Define Margins icon.
The ordinate dimension margin parameter input dialog displays
on the screen.

First Offset is the distance of the first margin to the edge of the
part.
Spacing is the distance of the first margin to the next margin.
Number of Margins is the total number of margins.

14-20

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Drafting Part 2

Select the bottom edge of the part near the origin.

When the margins are displayed, notice that one set is displayed
as a solid line and the other set is dotted. The margin that is
displayed as a solid line is the Active margin.

14
Step 5:

Create additional margins on the opposite side of the block.


Select the right edge near the top of the die plate opposite the
origin.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

14-21

Drafting Part 2

Notice that when the new margins are created, the Active margins
have changed.

14

Step 6:

Change the active margin (where the ordinate dimensions will be


placed when they are created).
Choose the Define Margins icon

again to turn it off.

Double-click the vertical margin closest to the part on the left


side.

The margin display changes from dotted to solid, indicating that it


is now one of the Active margins.
The margin can also be made active by selecting the
margin then using MB3 Set Active.

14-22

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Drafting Part 2

Double-click the horizontal margin closest to the bottom edge


of the part.

The margin display changes from dotted to solid, indicating that it


is now one of the Active margins.
Step 7:

Create an ordinate dimension.


Select the hole near the origin.

14

If you enable Control Point from the Snap Point toolbar,


you can select the holes centerline symbol and get a nice
gap between the symbol and the dimensions extension
line.
Two ordinate dimensions are created on the active margins.

Step 8:

Change the ordinate dimension preferences to match a different


standard.
Choose the Dimension Style icon.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

14-23

Drafting Part 2

Choose the Dimensions tab.


Change the dimension alignment to Aligned.

14
Choose the Ordinate tab.
This tab is new for NX 4.
Turn the Show Dimension Line option on.
Change the Start Offset (A) value to 20.

14-24

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Drafting Part 2

Choose OK.
Step 9:

Create additional ordinate dimensions.


Using the appropriate Snap Point options, select the three
points shown below.

14
The ordinate dimensions are created as you select the points.

Step 10: Create manual doglegs on the ordinate dimension.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

14-25

Drafting Part 2

Double-click the ordinate dimension 171.60.

14
Press the D key.
The D key is a single letter hot key. A dogleg is
dynamically inserted into the current ordinate dimension.

A dogleg can also be dynamically inserted by clicking an


ordinate dimension, then using MB3 (check) Dogleg.
Step 11: Edit the doglegs on the ordinate dimension.

14-26

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Drafting Part 2

Select the dogleg handles.

14

The dogleg parameter input dialog will display.

Key in 30 for the Start Offset, then press Enter. As you can
see, the dogleg changed shape and the Angle value changed
with respect to the new Start Offset value.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

14-27

Drafting Part 2

The dogleg handles can also be independently dragged


using the mouse. If the dogleg needs to be removed
altogether, simply select the dimension, then MB3
(uncheck) Dogleg.
Exit Ordinate Dimensions either by choosing the Ordinate
Dimension icon or by pressing the Escape key twice.
Step 12: Close all parts.

14

14-28

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Drafting Part 2

Activity - Creating Automatic Ordinate Dimensions


In this activity, you will:

create ordinate dimensions automatically


set the ordinate dimension preferences
create ordinate dimensions automatically by type and size
create ordinate dimensions automatically by type only
create ordinate dimensions automatically by location
move the origin location

Step 1:

Open the ordinate_auto part and make sure the Drafting


application is running.

Step 2:

Set the ordinate dimension preferences.

14

Choose Preferences Annotation.


Choose the Dimensions tab.
Change the dimension alignment to Aligned.
Choose the Ordinate tab.
Turn the Show Dimension Lines option on.
Change the Start Offset (A) value to 20.
Choose OK.
Step 3:

Set the auto ordinate dimension parameters to find only holes of


a specific size
Choose the Ordinate Dimension icon.
Click on the name ORDINATE1.
Choose the Auto Dimension icon.
The Auto Ordinate Dimension dialog is displayed.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

14-29

Drafting Part 2

Set the Auto Ordinate Dimension parameters as shown.

Select the view boundary.

14

There is only one view in this drawing to select. However, if you


had multiple views in a drawing, the one you select is where the
ordinate dimension is created.
Click and drag a rectangle around the view to select all the
geometry inside it.
Choose OK.
Exit Ordinate Dimensions.
As you can see ordinate dimensions are created on any cylindrical
surface. Some of the dimensions went to the diameter location of
fillets larger than 5 mm.

14-30

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Drafting Part 2

When this happens the ordinate dimension can be deleted or the


Size criteria can be set to very specific requirements to avoid the
selection of the fillets.

14

Step 4:

Create ordinate dimensions by type only.


You currently have the hole location on one view or drawing sheet
and you will have other types of ordinate dimensions to locate
other types of geometry on another view or drawing sheet.
Go to SHT2.

Choose the Ordinate Dimension icon


name ORDINATE2 inside the view.

then select the

You can also quickly enter the Ordinate Dimension


function by double-clicking the origin name.

Choose the Auto Dimension icon.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

14-31

Drafting Part 2

Set the Auto Ordinate Dimension parameters as shown.

Select the view boundary.

14

Click and drag a rectangle around the view to select all the
geometry in the view.
Choose OK.
You can also select the geometry or edges one at a time,
then OK the Auto Ordinate Dimension dialog.
As you see with his type of edge location, ordinate dimensions
can get complex and hard to read. You can clean your view up
either by dragging some dimensions to a different margin, deleting
selected dimensions, or through selecting by location. Selecting by
location will be discussed next.
Exit Ordinate Dimensions.
Step 5:

Create an ordinate dimension by location.


There are times when a detail view of a complex area requires
additional emphasis. You can use a larger scale on a detail in
combination with a rectangular selection to accomplish this.
Open SHT3.

Choose the Ordinate Dimension icon


ORDINATE3 inside the view.

then select

Choose the Auto Dimension icon.

14-32

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Drafting Part 2

Set the Auto Ordinate Dimension parameters as shown.

Select the view boundary.


Click and drag a rectangle around the view to select all the
geometry in it.

14

Choose OK.
Exit Ordinate Dimensions.
Note that the values of the ordinate dimensions are
both positive and negative because the origin is set to
Directional.
Step 6:

Move the origin location.


Because of different types of manufacturing requirements,
you may have to move the origin for one reason or another.
This is not a problem. All ordinate dimensions are
associative to their origin and will update as the origin
changes.
Double-click the origin name ORDINATE3 to enter the Ordinate
Dimension function.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

14-33

Drafting Part 2

With the cursor over the origin name, choose MB3 Move
Origin.

14

Select the arc center as shown below.

Notice the horizontal ordinate dimension values changed most


of them changed to positive values.
Exit Ordinate Dimensions.
Step 7:

14-34

Close all parts.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Drafting Part 2

Displaying Assembly Arrangements in Base Drawing Views


Assembly arrangements allow you to show one or more components of an
assembly in an alternate position. If you have created some arrangements in
your assembly, you can display them inside of a base drawing view.

This option can be applied either from the Choose Arrangement icon in
the Add Base View dialog bar or from the MB3 pop-up menu.

Once an arrangement has been chosen to be displayed in a view, changing


the displayed arrangement in the assembly will not affect the view.

Likewise when an arrangement has been chosen to be displayed in a view


you cannot change it afterward for another one.

Information Other View and will identify the name of the


arrangement currently depicted in the view. MB3 Style Base
will do the same thing for you.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

14

14-35

Drafting Part 2

Tracelines
The traceline tool is used to create lines that show how assembly components
in an exploded view fit together.

14

14-36

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Drafting Part 2

Activity - Creating Tracelines


In this activity you will:

create a simple exploded view and apply tracelines to it


add an exploded view with tracelines to the drawing
edit the color, font and width attributes of a traceline
edit the explosion offset distance of an assembly component to see how
the traceline moves with it
add tracelines to an existing exploded view and see how bend segments
are automatically applied to them
move a traceline segment

Step 1:

Set up for the activity.


Use FileOptionsLoad Options and make sure the Load
Method is set to From Directory.

14

Open the caster_dwg part and make sure the Modeling


application is running.

Insure that the Assemblies application is also checked.


Anywhere in the open menu bar area, press MB3 and verify
that Exploded Views is checked.

Insure that all of the icons you will need for this activity are
currently displayed inside your Exploded Views toolbar.
-

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

14-37

Drafting Part 2

Step 2:

Create an exploded view.


Choose Create Explosion.
OK the default name.
Choose Auto-explode Components.
Select the shaft (cyan).

your selection.

14

Distance = 6.0.
Choose OK.
Choose Auto-explode Components again.
Select the spacer (yellow).

your selection.
Distance = 2.0.
Choose OK.
MB3 Fit the view.

14-38

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Drafting Part 2

Your exploded view should look like:

14

Step 3:

Insert tracelines between the exploded components.


Choose

(Assemblies Exploded Views Create

Tracelines)

From the tracelines dialog bar choose Start Point .

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

14-39

Drafting Part 2

Using the Snap Point option


the shaft.

, select the bottom edge of

14

Choose End Point .


Select the hole visible on the top edge of the fork. (green)

14-40

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Drafting Part 2

Your completed traceline should appear like:

Step 4:

14

Set up traceline preferences.


Start the Drafting application.
On the drawing border, choose MB3 Add Base View.
Choose TRI.
Before placing the view on the drawing, have a look at the
traceline preference settings by choosing MB3 Style
Tracelines.

Edit the Visible color, font, and width parameter of your


traceline if you would like to change their display.
Note that you can also control the color, font and width display of
the hidden portion of the tracelines. You can likewise specify a gap
between the tracelines and the adjacent components.
Choose OK.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

14-41

Drafting Part 2

Place the view the drawing.

14

Step 5:

Edit the explosion distance of the shaft.


Return to the Modeling application.
Choose Auto-explode Components then select the shaft.

your selection .
Distance = 8.0.
Choose OK.
MB3 Fit the view.
Note how the end of the traceline has moved along with the shaft.
The drafting view will likewise reflect this change.
In the next activity you will add some tracelines to an existing
exploded view. However in this case the exploded components have
not only been moved away from their assembled positions, they are
no longer aligned with their mating components. What happens
in this case is that NX will automatically add bend segments to
the tracelines. You can either accept the initial placement of the
segments or move them for better visibility.
14-42

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Drafting Part 2

From the Exploded View toolbar, select Fork from the Work
View Explosion pull-down menu. (Assemblies Exploded
Views Show Explosion Fork OK)
MB3 Fit the view.

14
Start a traceline from the edge of the axle pin and end it at the
hole on the nearside of the fork. However before you OK the
traceline, move the bend segments to a better position in the
view. To do this, click and drag one of the segment arrows that
appear between the start and end points of the traceline. The
direction of movement will be parallel to the start and end
point directions.

Once you are satisfied with your segment positions, OK the


traceline.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

14-43

Drafting Part 2

Step 6:

Create a second traceline between the wheel and the fork, then
move the segments as needed for better visibility in the view.
Your finished view should resemble the one below.

14
If your traceline still needs work after you created it, MB3 click it,
then choose an option from the pop-up menu. Here you can move
the traceline segments, edit the display of the traceline, blank or
delete the traceline altogether.
Step 7:

Display an explosion complete with tracelines in one of the


orthographic views.
MB3 Replace View Front.
From the Exploded Views toolbar, replace (No Explosion) with
Explosion 1 .

Fit the view.


Return to Drafting, then update the drawing.
14-44

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Drafting Part 2

Add both the FRONT and TRI view to the drawing.

14

Step 8:

Move multiple drawing views.


Multiple drafting views can now be directly moved on the
drawing without invoking the Move/Copy View option.
Simply select two or more views, then click and drag one of
the views. The other views you selected will move along
with it.
MB1 select one or more views.
Position the cursor over the border of one of the selected views.
Click and drag the view to move it to a different location.
The other view(s) you selected will move along with it.
Rectangle select two or more views.
Again position the cursor over one of the selected views borders
then click and drag it to move all of the views.

Step 9:

Close all parts.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

14-45

Drafting Part 2

Section Lines without Section Views


You can construct any style of section line symbol on a drawing view without
creating a section view itself. The standalone section line symbol:

is created like any other section line symbol

is fully associative to the geometry in the parent view

will update as the model geometry changes

can be edited, rearranged or deleted altogether without affecting any


other view

To Create a Section Line without a Section View:

14

14-46

Choose Preferences Drafting General.

Under Create Section Line check Without Section View.

Choose the Add Section View icon

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

or Insert View Section View.

mt10026_g NX 4

Drafting Part 2

Non-Associative Drawing Views


A new option has been added to the View Style dialog which allows
you to create or convert a drafting view to a non-associative state. The
non-associative view:

is based on extracted edges from the model


will no longer update in the view as model geometry changes

can be used to import views from multiple parts onto a single drawing
sheet

does not require the model geometry to be exported with it

can be reverted back to an associative state at any time

14

To create a non-associative view:

Before placing the view on the drawing, choose MB3 Style General.

Under the Extracted Edges pull-down menu choose Non-Associative.

Add the view on the drawing as you normally would.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

14-47

Drafting Part 2

Empty Drawing Views


You can now place an empty drafting view onto a drawing sheet. The empty
drawing view:

14

14-48

inherits its layer visibility from the current layer settings

will not display any model geometry inside it

must be manually updated

can be used to sketch in

can be expanded and have text or view dependent geometry placed in it

can have its layer visibility, view label and scale edited like any other view

cannot serve as a parent view for a Projected, Detail, or Section view

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Drafting Part 2

Inheriting Centerline Angles from Auxiliary Views


A new option called Inherit Angle from View has been added to the centerline
utility symbols. This option when turned on will create centerline utility
symbols whose angle is derived from the projection angle of the view.

The Inherit Angle from View option can be set by default under File
Utilities Customer Defaults Drafting Utility Symbols General.

The centerline symbols angle is not associative and will not update if the
hinge line inside the parent view changes.

14

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

14-49

Drafting Part 2

Activity - Creating Angled Centerline Symbols


Step 1:

Open the nx4_drafting_transition part and make sure the Drafting


application is running.

Step 2:

Create a utility symbol.

14

Choose the Utility Symbol icon

or InsertSymbolUtility

Symbol.
Uncheck Inherit Angle from View.

Choose Automatic Centerline.


Select the auxiliary view.

14-50

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Drafting Part 2

Choose Apply.

The centerline symbols will be oriented parallel to the edges of the


drawing. This is not the result you wanted.
Choose Cancel.
Choose MB3 Undo.
Reapply the automatic centerlines to the same view, except this
time check Inherit Angle from View before you do so.

Now the centerlines are aligned correctly inside the view


projection corridor.
Multiple annotations can now be simultaneously moved on the
drawing sheet.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

14-51

14

Drafting Part 2

Step 3:

Move multiple annotations.


Open SH2.

14
MB1 select two or more dimensions.
Position the cursor over one of the selected dimensions.
Click and drag the dimension to move it to a different location.
The other dimensions you selected will move along with it.
Rectangle select two or more dimensions.
Again position the cursor over one of the selected dimensions
then click and drag it to move all of the selected dimensions.

14-52

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Drafting Part 2

Dimensioning to Extension Lines


Dimension extension lines are now selectable as points of reference for
creating new linear dimensions. In a lot of cases it is easier to select the
extension line of an existing dimension rather than selecting the model
geometry itself. The resulting dimension will be associated to the model
geometry via the extension line you selected. This technique can be applied to
the dimension types:

Inferred

Horizontal

Vertical

Parallel

Perpendicular

Cylindrical

14

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

14-53

Drafting Part 2

Associating Leaders to Dimension Extension Lines


Label and ID symbol leader lines can now be attached to the extension lines
of dimensions. You can:

attach a leader line to an existing dimension extension line when creating


a label

reattach the leader of an existing ID or GD&T symbol to a dimension


extension line

You have the choice of either selecting a point on the extension line or
selecting the dimension arrow itself to align to when attaching a leader line.
Once a leader has been attached to an extension line it will move when the
dimension moves.

14

14-54

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Drafting Part 2

Applying Thickness and Radius of Curvature Dimensions


A new dimension has been created for NX 4. Formerly known as the
Concentric Circle dimension, the Thickness dimension can now be applied to
tolerant as well as arc/circle edges. This dimension:

behaves the same as the Concentric Circle dimension when two arc/circle
edges are selected

behaves like a parallel dimension when two tolerant edges are selected

When two spline or conical edges are selected the dimensions value is based on
the normal direction at the point of selection on the first edge and the point of
intersection between the normal vector and the second edge selected. The
dimension will then calculate the shortest distance between these two points.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

14-55

14

Drafting Part 2

Activity - Applying a Thickness Dimension


Step 1:

Open the thickness part and make sure the Drafting application
is running.

Step 2:

Create a Thickness dimension.

14
Choose the Thickness icon

or Insert Dimension

Thickness.
Select the top edge of the part in the upper view.
Click the bottom edge in this view and drag the dimension to a
location on the drawing.

Note how you can drag this dimension to any point along the
edge of the part or past the actual part itself. In this case the
dimensions extension lines are circular.
Now apply a Thickness dimension to the edges in the lower
view.

Now the dimension is associated to two stationary points on the


edges you selected and will not move away from those points. Also
note that the dimensions extension lines are linear.
14-56

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Drafting Part 2

Step 3:

Create a Radius of Curvature dimension.


The Radius dimension has been enhanced to allow you to
directly select a spline or conical edge without having to
first simplify it.
Choose the Radius icon.
Position the cursor over the top edge of the part in the upper
view.
Click the edge and drag the dimension to place it on the
drawing.

14
Note how you can drag this dimension to any point on the edge as
well as beyond the edge itself
Apply a Radius dimension to the edge of the part in the lower
view.

The dimension will measure the radius of curvature at that specific


point you selected on the edge. If you try to move the dimension,
the dimensions text will move but the leader will stretch so that
the arrow remains associated to the original point selected.
Step 4:

Close the part.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

14-57

Drafting Part 2

Screen Positioning Cylindrical Centerlines


An enhancement to the Cylindrical Centerline utility symbol allows you to
indicate a screen position as one of the selected points. You can use this option
to add centerline symbols to views that have no valid geometry for control
point selection or you can apply the symbols directly to the drawing itself.
When the Cylindrical Centerline option is selected, the Point Position
pull-down menu will display the new option Screen Position.

14
You can used the Screen Position option in combination with the other Point
Position options Control Point, Intersection Point or Arc Center. However if
you need a screen positioned centerline symbol to move with a view, make
sure you create the symbol inside the expanded view.

14-58

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Drafting Part 2

Summary
In this lesson you were introduced to the new NX 4 functionality within the
Drafting application, including:

creating a sketch in drawing view

using the new detail view enhancements

learning about the new datum enhancements

using the new reassociate leader lines functionality

creating simple GD&T symbols using the new GD&T symbol interface

creating ordinate dimensions using the redesigned ordinate dimensions


interface

displaying an assembly arrangement in a base drawing view

adding tracelines to exploded assembly views

create a standalone section line symbol

creating non-associative and empty drawing view

creating angled centerline symbols in auxiliary views

applying a thickness and radius of curvature dimension

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

14-59

Appendix

A NX 2 to NX 4 Menu Maps
File Menu
NX 2 Location

NX 4 Location

Change

FileCollaborate

FileCollaborate

Removed:
Connect to E-vis
Connect to NetMeeting
End Call
Place Call from Directory
Share Program
Chat
Whiteboard
Transfer Files

E-vis and NetMeeting have been replaced by Teamcenter Community on the


Collaborate menu.
FileExecute UG/Open
FileExecute
UG/OpenUser Function
FileExportRapid
- Prototyping

FileExecute
FileExecuteNX Open

FileExportSTL

Edit Menu
You must be in the Modeling application to see many of these options.
NX 2 Location

NX 4 Location

Edit Delayed Update on


Edit

Tools Update
Delayed after Edit

Edit Feature Resize


Fixed Datums

Insert Datum/Point
Resize Fixed Datums

Edit Free Form Feature


Edit Parts List Levels
Edit Update

EditSurface

Notes

Removed
Tools Update Update
Model

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

A-1

NX 2 to NX 4 Menu Maps

View Menu
NX 2 Location

Change

ViewCurvature Graphs

Removed

ViewOperationNavigate
Removed
ViewToolbars
Removed
ViewVisualizationCreate Quick Image Removed
Insert Menu, Curve Options
You must be in the Modeling application to see many of these options.

NX 2 Location

NX 4 Location

InsertCurvePlane
InsertCurvePoint

InsertDatum/PointPlane
InsertDatum/PointPoint

InsertCurvePoint Set
InsertCurveSpline by Points
InsertCurveSpline by Poles

InsertDatum/PointPoint Set
InsertCurveStudio Spline
InsertCurveStudio Spline

InsertCurve OperationBridge
InsertCurve
OperationCombined
Projection
InsertCurve OperationExtract

InsertCurve from CurvesBridge


InsertCurve from CurvesCombined
Projection

InsertCurve OperationIntersect
InsertCurve OperationJoin

InsertCurve from BodiesIntersect


InsertCurve from CurvesJoin

InsertCurve from BodiesExtract

InsertCurve OperationOffset
InsertCurve from CurvesOffset
InsertCurve OperationOffset in Face InsertCurve from CurvesOffset in Face
InsertCurve OperationProject
InsertCurve from CurvesProject
InsertCurve OperationSection
InsertCurve from BodiesSection
InsertCurve OperationSimplify
InsertCurve from CurvesSimplify
InsertCurve OperationWrap/Unwrap InsertCurve from
CurvesWrap/Unwrap

A-2

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

NX 2 to NX 4 Menu Maps

Insert Menu, Feature Operation Options


You must be in the Modeling application to see many of these options.
NX 2 Location

NX 4 Location

InsertFeature OperationBody Taper


InsertFeature OperationChamfer

InsertDetail FeatureBody Taper


InsertDetail FeatureChamfer

InsertFeature OperationEdge Blend InsertDetail FeatureEdge Blend


InsertFeature OperationEmboss SheetInsertCombine BodiesEmboss Sheet
InsertFeature OperationFace Blend InsertDetail FeatureFace Blend
InsertFeature OperationHollow
InsertFeature OperationInstance
InsertFeature OperationIntersect

InsertOffset/ScaleHollow
InsertAssociative CopyInstance
InsertCombine BodiesIntersect

InsertFeature OperationOffset Face


InsertFeature OperationPatch
InsertFeature OperationPromote

InsertOffset/ScaleOffset Face
InsertCombine BodiesPatch
InsertAssociative CopyPromote

InsertFeature OperationScale
InsertFeature OperationSew
InsertFeature OperationSimplify

InsertOffset/ScaleScale
InsertCombine BodiesSew
InsertDirect ModelingSimplify

InsertFeature OperationSoft Blend


InsertFeature OperationSplit

InsertDetail FeatureSoft Blend


InsertTrimSplit

InsertFeature OperationSubtract

InsertCombine BodiesSubtract

InsertFeature OperationTaper
InsertFeature OperationThread
InsertFeature OperationTrim

InsertDetail FeatureTaper
InsertDesign FeatureThread
InsertTrimTrim

InsertFeature OperationUnite
InsertFeature
OperationWrap
Geometry

InsertCombine BodiesUnite
InsertOffset/ScaleWrap Geometry

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

A-3

NX 2 to NX 4 Menu Maps

Insert Menu, Form Feature Options


You must be in the Modeling application to see many of these options.

NX 2 Location

NX 4 Location

InsertForm FeatureBlock
InsertForm FeatureBoss

InsertDesign FeatureBlock
InsertDesign FeatureBoss

InsertForm FeatureBounded Plane


InsertForm FeatureCone
InsertForm FeatureCylinder

InsertSurfaceBounded Plane
InsertDesign FeatureCone
InsertDesign FeatureCylinder

InsertForm FeatureDart
InsertForm FeatureDatum Axis
InsertForm FeatureDatum CSYS

InsertDesign FeatureDart
InsertDatum/PointDatum Axis
InsertDatum/PointDatum CSYS

InsertForm FeatureDatum Plane


InsertForm FeatureExtract
InsertForm FeatureExtruded Body

InsertDatum/PointDatum Plane
InsertAssociative CopyExtract
InsertDesign FeatureExtrude

InsertForm FeatureGroove
InsertForm FeatureHole
InsertForm FeaturePad

InsertDesign FeatureGroove
InsertDesign FeatureHole
InsertDesign FeaturePad

InsertForm FeaturePocket
InsertForm FeatureRevolve

InsertDesign FeaturePocket
InsertDesign FeatureRevolve

InsertForm FeatureSheet from CurvesInsertSurfaceSheet from Curves


InsertForm FeatureSheets to
Solid
Assistant

InsertOffset/ScaleSheets to Solid
Assistant

InsertForm FeatureSlot

InsertDesign FeatureSlot

InsertForm FeatureSphere
InsertDesign FeatureSphere
InsertForm FeatureSweep along Guide InsertSweepSweep along Guide
InsertForm FeatureThicken Sheet
InsertOffset/ScaleThicken Sheet
InsertForm FeatureTube
InsertForm FeatureUser Defined

A-4

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

InsertSweepTube
InsertDesign FeatureUser Defined

mt10026_g NX 4

NX 2 to NX 4 Menu Maps

Insert Menu, Free Form Feature Options


You must be in the Modeling application to see many of these options.
NX 2 Location
NX 4 Location
InsertFree Form FeatureBridge
InsertDetail FeatureBridge
InsertFree Form FeatureExtension
InsertSurfaceExtension (Hidden)
InsertFree Form FeatureFillet
InsertDetail FeatureFillet
InsertFree Form FeatureForeign
InsertSurfaceForeign (Hidden)
InsertFree Form FeatureFrom
InsertSurfaceFrom Point Cloud
Point
Cloud
InsertFree Form FeatureFrom Poles InsertSurfaceFrom Poles
InsertFree Form FeatureLaw Extension InsertFlange SurfaceLaw Extension
InsertFree Form FeatureMidsurface InsertSurfaceMidsurface
InsertFree Form FeatureNInsertMesh SurfaceN-Sided Surface
Sided
Surface
InsertFree Form FeatureOffset
InsertOffset/ScaleOffset
InsertFree Form FeatureQuilt
InsertCombine BodiesQuilt (Hidden)
InsertFree Form FeatureRibbon Builder InsertSurfaceRibbon Builder
InsertFree Form FeatureRough Offset InsertOffset/ScaleRough Offset
InsertFree Form FeatureRuled
InsertMesh SurfaceRuled
InsertFree Form FeatureSection
InsertMesh SurfaceSection
InsertFree Form
InsertMesh Surface1x1
FeatureStudio
Surface1x1
InsertMesh Surface1x2
InsertFree Form
FeatureStudio
InsertMesh Surface2x0
Surface1x2
InsertFree Form
InsertMesh Surface2x2
FeatureStudio
Surface2x0
InsertMesh Surfacenxn
InsertFree Form
FeatureStudio
Surface2x2
InsertFree Form
FeatureStudio
Surfacenxn
InsertFree Form FeatureStyled Blend InsertDetail FeatureStyled Blend
InsertFree Form FeatureSurface by InsertSurfaceSurface by 4 Points
4
Points
InsertFree Form FeatureSwept
InsertSweepSwept
InsertFree Form FeatureSwoop
InsertSurfaceSwoop
InsertFree Form FeatureThrough Curve InsertMesh SurfaceThrough Curve
Mesh
Curves
InsertFree Form
FeatureThrough

Mesh

InsertMesh SurfaceThrough Curves

InsertFree Form FeatureThrough Points InsertSurfaceThrough Points


InsertFree Form FeatureTransition InsertSurfaceTransition
InsertFree Form FeatureTrimmed Sheet InsertTrimTrimmed Sheet

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

A-5

NX 2 to NX 4 Menu Maps

Other Insert Menu Options


NX 2 Location

Change
Removed

InsertSheet Metal
FeatureUtilitiesStra
in
InsertView (Drafting)

View creation broken into many different


options on menu.

Format Menu
NX 2 Location

NX 4 Location

Change

FormatLayout
FormatOpen Sheet

ViewLayout
Same

Hidden

NX 4 Location
Same

Change
Hidden

Tools Menu
NX 2 Location
ToolsDefine Deformable
Part
ToolsQuick Check
ToolsUG/Manager

ToolsUG/ManagerSa
ve
Outside IMAN

InsertQuick Check
ToolsNX Manager
ToolsNX
ManagerSave Outside
Teamcenter Engineering

ToolsUnits Converter

ToolsUnits Manager

AnalysisUnits (last
used units)Units
Converter
AnalysisUnits (last
used units)Units Manager

Assemblies Menu
NX 2 Location

NX 4 Location

AssembliesDelay Interpart Updates


AssembliesUpdate Session

ToolsUpdateDelay Interpart
ToolsUpdateUpdate Session

A-6

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

NX 2 to NX 4 Menu Maps

WCS Menu
The entire WCS menu has been moved to the Format menu.
NX 2 Location

NX 4 Location

WCSChange XC Direction
WCSChange YC Direction

FormatWCSChange XC Direction
FormatWCSChange YC Direction

WCSDisplay
WCSDynamics
WCSOrient

FormatWCSDisplay
FormatWCSDynamics
FormatWCSOrient

WCSOrigin
WCSRotate

FormatWCSOrigin
FormatWCSRotate

WCSSave

FormatWCSSave

Analysis Menu
NX 2 Location

NX 4 Location
AnalysisCheck VDA-4955 Same
Compliance

Change
Hidden

AnalysisCheck-Mate
Author Checks

AnalysisCheck-Mate
Author Tests

AnalysisCheck-Mate
Run

AnalysisCheck-MateRun
Tests

AnalysisDraft
AnalysisShapeDraft

Removed

AnalysisFace
AnalysisShapeFace
AnalysisMass
PropertiesArea
using Faces

Removed

Removed

AnalysisMass
PropertiesArea
using Solids
AnalysisShapeGrid
Section
AnalysisShapeSurfa
ce
Continuity Analysis

AnalysisShapeSurface
Continuity

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

A-7

NX 2 to NX 4 Menu Maps

Preferences Menu
NX 2 Location

NX 4 Location

PreferencesUG/Manager

PreferencesNX Manager

Application Menu
NX 2 Location

NX 4 Location

ApplicationGenerative
Modeling
ApplicationSheet
MetalDesign

Change
Removed

ApplicationSheet
MetalNX Sheet Metal
ApplicationSheet
MetalForming/Flattenin
g

A-8

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Appendix

B Creating Lines and Arcs


Lines and Arcs is a special pull-down menu and toolbar that lets you quickly
create associative or non-associative lines and curves using predefined
constraint combinations. You do not have to open a dialog or operate any
icon option controls.

Basic Procedures
Associative

Line Point-Point

Choose this option to specify that the


curve you create is an associative feature.
Associative curves update automatically if
their input parameters change. You can
edit associative curves using Edit
Parameters or the Part Navigator Details
Panel. This option works like a toggle
switch.
Creates a line using start and end point
constraints.
1. Select the start point location for the
line.
2. Select the end point location.
3. Click MB1 to create the line.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

B-1

Creating Lines and Arcs

Creates a line using a start point and an


Along XC, YC or ZC direction constraint.

Line XYZ

1. Select a start point location for the line.


2. Move the cursor around the start point
to snap to the desired X, Y or Z inferred
direction.
3. To create the line do one of the
following:

Line Point-Parallel

Rubberband the line to get the


desired length and click MB1.
Specify a length in the dynamic
input box and press the Return key.

Creates a line using a start point and a


parallel constraint (Angle constraint set to
0/180 degrees).
1. Select a start point location for the line.
2. Select a line for a parallel constraint.
3. To create the line do one of the
following:

Rubberband the line to get the


desired length and click MB1.
Select an object to limit the length
of the line.
Specify a length in the dynamic
input box and press the Return key.

Line Point-Perpendicular

Creates a line using a start point and a


perpendicular constraint (Angle constraint
set to 90 degrees).
1. Select a start point location for the line.
2. Select a line for a perpendicular
constraint.
3. To create the line do one of the
following:

Rubberband the line to get the


desired length and click MB1.
Select an object to limit the length
of the line.
Specify a length in the dynamic
input box and press the Return key.

B-2

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Creating Lines and Arcs

Line Point-Tangent

Creates a line using a start point and


tangent constraints.
1. Select a start point location for the line.
Once you have selected the start point
you can optionally enter a length for
the line by:

rubberbanding a length, or
entering a value in the dynamic
input box,

followed by pressing the Return key.


2. Use MB1 to select a curve for the
tangent constrain and create the line.
Line Tangent-Tangent

Creates a line using a tangent to tangent


constraints.
1. Select a curve for a tangent constraint
for the line.
Once you have selected the start point
you can optionally enter a length for
the line by:

rubberbanding a length, or
entering a value in the dynamic
input box,

followed by pressing the Return key.


2. Use MB1 to select a curve for the
tangent constrain and create the line.

Unbounded Line

Uses the Extend Line to Screen Bounds


option with the currently selected line
creation method to create a line bounded
by the view limits.
This option works like a toggle switch.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

B-3

Creating Lines and Arcs

Arc Point-Point-Point

Creates an arc using three


point constraints.
1. Select a start point location constraint
for the arc.
2. Select an end point location constraint
for the arc.
3. Select a middle point
location constraint to create
the arc.

Arc Point-Point-Tangent

Creates an arc using start and end point


constraints and a tangent constraint.
1. Select a start point location constraint
for the arc.
2. Select an end point location constraint
for the arc.
3. Select a tangent constraint curve to
create the arc.

Arc
Tangent-Tangent-Tangent

Arc
Tangent-Tangent-Radius

Creates an arc that has tangent constraints


with three other arcs.
1. Select a curve for the first tangent
constraint.
2. Select a curve for the second tangent
constraint
3. Select a third tangent constraint curve
to create the arc.
Creates an arc with tangent constraints
to two arcs and has a specified radius
constraint.
1. Select a curve for the first tangent
constraint.
2. Select a curve for the second tangent
constraint.
3. Specify a radius and create the arc
using one of these methods:

B-4

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

Drag the cursor and rubberband the


preview arc until it has the desired
radius and click MB1.
Enter a radius in the dynamic
input box, followed by pressing the
Return key.

mt10026_g NX 4

Creating Lines and Arcs

Circle Point-Point-Point

Creates a complete arc circle using three


point constraints.
1. Select a start point for the circle.
2. Select an end point for the circle.
3. Select a middle point to create the
circle.

Circle
Point-Point-Tangent

Creates a complete arc circle using start


and end point constraints and a tangent
constraint.
1. Select a start point for the circle.
2. Select an end point for the circle.
3. Select a tangent constraint curve to
create the circle.

Circle
Tangent-Tangent-Tangent

Circle
Tangent-Tangent-Radius

Creates a complete arc circle with tangent


constraints to three other arcs.
1. Select a curve for a tangent constraint.
2. Select a second curve for another
tangent constraint.
3. Select a third tangent constraint curve
to create the circle.
Creates a complete arc circle with start and
end tangent constraints and a specified
radius constraint.
1. Select a curve for the first tangent
constraint.
2. Select a curve for the second tangent
constraint.
3. Specify a radius and create the arc
circle using one of these methods:

Drag the cursor and rubberband the


preview arc until it has the desired
radius and click MB1.
Enter a radius in the dynamic
input box, followed by pressing the
Return key.

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

B-5

Creating Lines and Arcs

Circle Center-Point

Creates a center-based arc circle using


center and start point constraints.
1. Select a center point constraint.
2. Select a start point constraint to create
the arc circle.

Circle Center-Radius

Creates a center-based arc circle using


center and radius constraints.
1. Select a center point constraint.
2. Specify a radius and create the arc
circle using one of these methods:

Circle Center-Tangent

Drag the cursor and rubberband the


preview arc until it has the desired
radius and click MB1.
Enter a radius in the dynamic
input box, followed by pressing the
Return key.

Creates an center-based arc circle using a


center and tangent constraints
1. Select a center point constraint.
2. Select a tangent constraint curve to
create the arc circle.

B-6

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

mt10026_g NX 4

Index

A
Activities
Assemblies
Arrangements . . . . . . . . . . 12-22
Assembly Cut . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11
Drafting
Adding a View from Another
Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-38
Adding Views to a
Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14
Creating a Section View . . . 13-31
Displaying Components on Drawing
Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-41
Using the Orient View
Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-23
Gateway
Adding Options to a Toolbar and the
Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Overview of Radial
Pop-ups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Using Measurements . . . . . . 1-33
Modeling-Curves
Creating Associative Lines . . 11-3
Creating Associative
Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13
Modeling-Features
Creating a Dart Feature . . . . 7-22
Creating a Spherical
Corner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Extruding with Offsets . . . . . 6-10
Using User Defined
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28
Modeling-Free Form
Exploring Silhouette
Flanges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-47
Smoothing a Spline . . . . . . . . 8-3
Spline Creation
Enhancements . . . . . . . . 8-55
-

Studio Spline Constraints and


Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-64
Styled Corner . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35
Surface Extend and Trim . . . 8-18
Using Pole Smoothing . . . . . . 8-8
Using Rebuild . . . . . . . . . . . 8-77
Using Styled Blend . . . . . . . 8-26
Using Styled Sweep . . . . . . . 8-72
Modeling-General
Applying Measurements . . . . 5-23
Dimensionality in
Expressions . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Visualization
Interacting with the Color
Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Mapping a Legacy Color Table to
New Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Real-Time Shadowing . . . . . 3-35
Using Sectioning . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Activity
Applying a Thickness
Dimension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-56
Bridging Two Curves on a
Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-54
Clearance Analysis . . . . . . . . . . 12-45
Cloud Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-57
Cloud Points on a Faceted
Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-59
Creating a Multi-body Taper . . . . . 7-3
Creating a Revolve Feature . . . . . 6-16
Creating a Simple Face Blend . . . 4-12
Creating a Sketch in Drawing
View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3
Creating a User Role . . . . . . . . . 2-25
Creating a Variational Sweep
Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
Creating an Emboss Feature . . . . . 9-8

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

Index-1

Index

Creating an Offset Surface from Sewn


Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26
Creating Angled Centerline
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-50
Creating Automatic Ordinate
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-29
Creating Chamfers . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44
Creating Drafts . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
Creating Fit Splines . . . . . . . . . 11-43
Creating Offset Surfaces Using the
Allow Step Boundaries . . . . . . 9-29
Creating Tracelines . . . . . . . . . 14-37
Defining the PMI Annotation
Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-17
Editing Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-34
Editing Sketch Dimensions . . . . . 10-5
Examining the New Trim
Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Falloff with Translate along Control
Polygon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Fitting a Face and Using
Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-49
Generating Text Along Curve . . 11-25
Grouping Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
Inheriting PMI Data into a Base
Drawing View . . . . . . . . . . . 15-28
Intersecting Curves Using Two Sets of
Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-19
New Datum Plane
Enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52
PMI Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-4
Replacing Features . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38
Selecting and Editing a
Leader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-11
Text On Face . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-29
Through Curves (Normal to End
Sections) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33
Using Dividing Face . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
Using Follow Fillet . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
Using NX 4 Selection Modes . . . . 1-11
Using QuickPick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Using Refit Face with a Target
Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Using Shell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Using the Enhanced Ordinate
Dimension Tool . . . . . . . . . . 14-19

Index-2

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

Using the Feature Control Frame


Builder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Variable Radius Edge Blend . . . .
Analysis Objects
Display Enhancement . . . . . . . . .
Information Enhancements . . . .
Assemblies
Advanced Weight
Management . . . . . . . . . . . .
Assembly Arrangements
The Assembly Arrangements
Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Assembly Cut Characteristics . . .
Assembly Cut Notes . . . . . . . . . .
Assembly Navigator
Filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clearance Analysis
Default Settings . . . . . . . . .
Study Clearance
Violations . . . . . . . . . . .
Clearance Analysis
Enhancements . . . . . . . . . . .
Display Instancing: Facet
Sharing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
New Parent Assembly . . . . . . . . .
Partial Update . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reference Sets Enhancements . .
WAVE Geometry Linker
Datum Coordinate System . .
Assembly Arrangements
Base Drawing Views . . . . . . . . .
Automatic Constraints . . . . . . . . . .

14-15
6-36
4-14
4-15
12-49
12-17
12-7
12-9
12-34
12-44
12-43
12-40
12-50
12-2
12-38
12-3
12-6
14-35
10-3

B
Body Taper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
C
Chamfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clearance Navigator
Enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Curve Fit Method . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Curves
Bridge Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cloud Sections
Point Output . . . . . . . . . . .

6-43
12-40
9-23
11-53
11-56

mt10026_g NX 4

Index

Edit Curve Length . . . . . . . . . . 11-33


Edit Offset Point . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12
Fit Spline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-38
Geometric Properties . . . . . . . . 11-61
Intersection Curve
Multiple Objects
Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-18
Offset Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-16
Offset in Face . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-17
Project Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-52
Text to Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . 11-24
Trim Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-33
Customer Defaults
Directory Structures . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
DPV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30, 2-32
Setting Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
Upgrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
D
Datum CSYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Datum Plane
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Datum Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deviation Gauge
Colored Needle Display . . . . . . . .
Enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Markers and Labels . . . . . . . . . .
Tolerancing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dialog
Assemblies
Assembly Arrangements . .
Chamfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Datum CSYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Draft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Face Blend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fit Spline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Degree and Segments . . . . .
Degree and Tolerance . . . . .
Selection Steps . . . . . . . . . .
Template Curve . . . . . . . . .
Gateway
Customer Defaults . . . . . . . .

6-47
6-51
6-49
6-49
4-20
4-18
4-21
4-19
12-17
6-43
6-47
6-22
6-23
. 4-9
11-39
11-39
11-39
11-41
11-40
2-35

Inferred Constraint Settings . . . . 10-3


Modeling-Features
Dart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
Extrude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Modeling-Free Form
Pole Smoothing . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Section Analysis . . . . . . . . . . 8-24
Silhouette Flange . . . . . . . . . 8-43
Smooth Spline . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Styled Sweep . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-67
Trim and Extend . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Offset Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
Replace Features . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37
Shell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Study Clearance Violations . . . . 12-43
Trim Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Visualization
Edit Environment Cube
Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Sectioning Definition . . . . . . . 3-7
Shadow Settings . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Divide Face . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13
Drafting
Adding Views to Drawing
Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
Base Drawing Views
Assembly Arrangements . . 14-35
Creating Detail Views . . . . . . . . . 13-9
Creating Section Views . . . . . . . 13-29
Cylindrical Centerline
Screen Positioning . . . . . . . 14-58
Datum Extension Line Control . . 14-9
Datum on Centerline . . . . . . . . . 14-8
Detail/Parent View
Enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-7
Dimensions
Thickness and Radius of
Curvature . . . . . . . . . . . 14-55
Displaying Specific Components on
Drawing Sheets . . . . . . . . . . 13-40
Drawing Sheets With Raster
Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-48
Empty Drawing Views . . . . . . . 14-48
Extension Lines
Associating Leaders to . . . . 14-54
Dimensioning to . . . . . . . . . 14-53

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

Index-3

Index

GD&T Symbol Creation . . . . . . 14-13


Inherit Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-49
Inspection and Reference
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-47
MB3 Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
Non-Associative Drawing
Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-47
Ordinate Dimension Tool
Enhancement . . . . . . . . . . . 14-18
Reassociating Leader Lines . . . . 14-10
Section Lines without Section
Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-46
Sketch in Drawing Member
View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
Stepped Section Views . . . . . . . 13-30
Tracelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-36
View Creation Options Bar . . . . . 13-3
View Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
Views
Inheriting PMI Data into a Drafting
View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-26
Views From Other Parts . . . . . . 13-37
Drawing Views
Auxiliary Views
Inheriting Centerline
Angles . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-49
Empty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-48
Non-Associative . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-47
Dynamic Hidden Edges . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
E
Edit with Rollback
Modeling Preferences . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Editing Sketch Curves . . . . . . . . . 10-12
Editing Sketch Dimensions . . . . . . 10-4
Emboss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Expressions
Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
Extrude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
F
Face Blend
Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Facet Sharing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-50
Index-4

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

Feature Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4


Modeling Preferences . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Name Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Features
Body Taper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Chamfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-43
Datum CSYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-47
Datum Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-49
Extrude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Multi-Body Feature . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Replace Features . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37
Revolve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Shell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18, 6-21
Trim Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Follow Fillet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
Free Form Features
Curve Fit Method . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23
Divide Face . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13
Emboss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Global Shaping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
Offset Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
Polygon Subdivision . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
Rebuild Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-80
Through Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32
Variational Sweep . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
G
Gateway
Combining of Selection Modes . . . . 1-9
Customer Defaults
Importing/Exporting of
Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
Searching Customer
Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
The Customer Defaults
Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
Customer Defaults File
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
Customize
Customizing the Keyboard
Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Customizing the View Pop-up
Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Load Options Access in File Selection
Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28
mt10026_g NX 4

Index

and Modeling Functions . . . . 1-32


and Part Navigator . . . . . . . 1-30
and the Expressions Editor . . 1-30
Mouse Gesture Enhancements . . 1-14
Dynamic Pop-ups Over Preselected
Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Mouse Wheel Zoom to Cursor
Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
View Rotation About a Preselected
Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Multiple Graphics Windows . . . . 1-38
Characteristics of Multiple
Windows . . . . . . . . . 1-39, 2-30
QuickPick Enhancements . . . . . . . 1-4
Selection Preferences . . . . . . . 1-5
Radial Pop-ups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Roles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Selection Intent User Interface . . 1-23
Starting NX Applications . . . . . . . 1-2
Toolbar and Menu Bar
Customization . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Dragging and Dropping . . . . . 2-6
Units Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
GD&T
Symbol Creation in Drafting . . . 14-13
Geometric Tolerancing Toolbar . . . 15-34
Global Shaping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
H
Highlight with Thick Width . . . . . . . 3-5
M
Measurements
Maximum Distance . . . . . . . . . .
Radial Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Modeling
Curves
Bridge Curve . . . . . . . . . . .
Cloud Sections . . . . . . . . . .
Edit Curve Length . . . . . . .
Edit Offset Point . . . . . . . .
Fit Spline . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Geometric Properties . . . . .
Intersection Curve . . . . . . .
Offset Curves . . . . . . . . . . .

1-29
1-29
11-53
11-56
11-33
11-12
11-38
11-61
11-18
11-16

Offset in Face . . . . . . . . . . . 11-17


Project Curve . . . . . . . . . . . 11-52
Text to Geometry . . . . . . . . 11-24
Trim Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-33
Features
Body Taper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Chamfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-43
Datum CSYS . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-47
Datum Planes . . . . . . . . . . . 6-49
Extrude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Multi-Body Feature . . . . . . . . 6-8
Replace Features . . . . . . . . . 7-37
Revolve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Shell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18, 6-21
Trim Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Free Form Features
Curve Fit Method . . . . . . . . . 9-23
Divide Face . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13
Emboss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Global Shaping . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
Offset Surface . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
Polygon Subdivision . . . . . . . 9-22
Rebuild Surface . . . . . . . . . . 8-80
Variational Sweep . . . . . . . . 9-17
General
Edit with Rollback . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Feature Names . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Mesh Surface
Through Curves . . . . . . . . . . 9-32
Sketcher
Automatic Constraints . . . . . 10-3
Dimension Creation . . . . . . . 10-4
Display Object Color . . . . . 10-13
Editing Sketch Curves . . . . 10-12
Editing Sketch Dimensions . . 10-4
Inferred Constraint Settings
Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Intersections . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18
Part Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
Projecting Sketch
Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
Sketch Color Preferences . . 10-13
Sketch in Member View . . . 10-19
Sketch on Path . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
Unconstrained Mode . . . . . . 10-2
Modeling-Curves

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

Index-5

Index

Associative Points . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12


Curve Fit Method
Enhancement . . . . . . . . . . . 11-36
Lines and Arcs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11
Other Associative Curves
Associative Curves with
Solids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11
Associative Mirror
Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11
Modeling-Features
Blend Enhancements . . . . . . . . . 6-34
Dart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
The Dart Dialog . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
Extrude
The Extrude Dialog . . . . . . . . 6-3
Spherical Corner . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
User Defined Feature
Enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27
Modeling-Free Form
3D B-Spline Construction and
Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-52
3D Spline Construction By
Poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-62
B-Splines and Surfaces . . . . 8-63
Defining Point and End Pole
Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . 8-53
Dynamic Positioning . . . . . . 8-54
Inferred Constraints . . . . . . 8-53
Specified Constraints . . . . . . 8-54
B-Spline Curve Smoothing . . . . . . 8-2
Smooth Spline Dialog . . . . . . . 8-2
Grid and Section Analysis . . . . . . 8-24
Section Analysis Dialog . . . . 8-24
Rough Surface Offset . . . . . . . . . 8-39
Silhouette Flange . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-40
Handles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-46
Silhouette Flange Dialog . . . 8-43
Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-41
Styled Blend Enhancements . . . . 8-25
Styled Corner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34
Styled Sweep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-66
Rebuild Surface . . . . . . . . . . 8-81
The Styled Sweep Dialog . . . 8-67
Surface Extend and Trim
Trim and Extend Dialog . . . . 8-15
Surface Pole Smoothing . . . . . . . . 8-5

Index-6

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

Pole Smoothing Dialog . . . . . . 8-6


Surface Trim and Extend . . . . . . 8-14
Modeling-General
DesignLogic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Creating and Editing
Measurements . . . . . . . . 5-18
Feature Parameter
Specification . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Measurements in the Expressions
Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
Measures and
Measurements . . . . . . . . 5-21
Part Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Changes in Part Navigator Default
Look . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Data Organization in the Part
Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Feature Sets/Grouping in the Part
Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Interpart Dependencies and the
Part Navigator . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Interpart Expressions
Dependencies . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Model Views in the Part
Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Multi-Body Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
O
Offset Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
P
Part Navigator
Feature Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Grouping Sketch Elements . . . . . 10-6
PMI objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-3
PMI
Application Overview . . . . . . . . . 15-2
Geometric Tolerancing . . . . . . . 15-34
Inheriting PMI Data into a Drafting
View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-26
Object Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-3
Part Navigator
Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-3
PMI Annotation Plane . . . . . . . 15-15
Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-14

mt10026_g NX 4

Index

Secondary Extension Lines . . . . 15-16


Toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2
Polygon Subdivision . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
Procedure
Creating a Group Role . . . . . . . . 2-27
Creating a User Role . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Creating an Emboss Feature . . . . . 9-6
Customizing the Keyboard
Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Customizing the View Pop-up
Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Filtering within the Assembly
Navigator . . . . . . . . . . 12-2, 12-36
Partially Updating an
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-39
Update Structure on Expand Option in
Customer Defaults . . . . . . . . 12-38
Procedures
Drafting
Adding Perspective Views on
Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8
Arrangements of
Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . 13-46
Creating a True View Auxiliary
View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11
Starting a base view with MB3 on
the Drawing Border . . . . 13-2
Starting a base view with the Part
Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
Gateway
Customizing
Toolbars/Menus . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Multiple Windows . . . . . . . . 1-39
Modeling-Features
Simple Extrusion . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Modeling-General
Setting Up Model Views . . . . . 5-8
Visualization
Creating a Section Cut . . . . . 3-12
Q
QuickPick
Enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Selection Preferences . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

R
Rebuild Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-80
Reference Sets Enhancements . . . . 12-3
Replace Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37
Revolve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Display of Multiple Parameter Entry
Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
New Selection Steps . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Roles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
User-Defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
S
Selection
Combining of Selection Modes . . . . 1-9
New Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
Selection Control and
Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Selection Intent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
Follow Fillet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
Options Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
Previewing Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
User Interface Enhancements . . . 1-23
Shade Exterior Faces . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Shading Languages . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Supported
Materials/Textures/Lights . . . 3-24
Shape Studio
Analysis Objects
Display Enhancement . . . . . 4-14
Deviation Gauge Enhancement . . 4-18
Surface Fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Update for Face Blend . . . . . . . . . 4-9
X-form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Shell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18, 6-21
Sketch Color Preferences . . . . . . . 10-13
Sketch in Member View . . . . . . . . 10-19
Sketch on Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
Sketch Preferences
Display Object Color . . . . . . . . . 10-13
Sketcher Constraints
Create Inferred Constraints . . . . 10-2
Start Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

Index-7

Index

Surface Fitting

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23

High Quality Image


Image-based Lighting . . . . . 3-30
Highlight with Thick Width . . . . . 3-5
Real Time Shadows . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
Advanced Lights . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Environment Cubes . . . . . . . 3-34
High Quality Image
Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
Visualization Performance
Preference . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Real-Time Shadowing
Shadow Settings Dialog . . . . 3-36
Shade Exterior Faces . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Shading Languages . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Updated and Legacy Color Definition
Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
View Rendering Style . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Visual Effects
Image-based Lighting . . . . . 3-28

T
Text to Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-24
Through Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32
Trim Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
U
Update for Face Blend . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Utility Symbols
Cylindrical Centerline
Screen Positioning . . . . . . . 14-58
V
Variational Sweep . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
View Rendering Style . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Pop-up Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Visualization
Advanced Lights
Image-based Lighting . . . . . 3-29
Dynamic Hidden Edges . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Dynamic Sectioning
Enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Sectioning Considerations . . 3-18
Sectioning Definition Dialog . . 3-7
Environment Cube
Image-based Lighting . . . . . 3-31
Environment Cubes
Enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Edit Environment Cube Image
Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
High End Visual Effects and
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27

Index-8

NX2NX4 CAD Transition

W
WAVE
Geometry Linker
Datum Coordinate System . . 12-6
Workflow
Roles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
X
X-form
Feature on Demand . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Keep Slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Micro Positioning
Enhancement . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33

mt10026_g NX 4

UGS Education Services offers a blend of training


solutions for all of our product lifecycle management
products.
Our Online Store Learning Advantage was
developed to provide our customers with just in time
training for the latest in application developments.

L
E
A
R
N
I
N

Here are some of the Learning Advantages:


Customers have direct access
Self-paced course layout
Online Assessments

Just in time training for the latest release

To learn more about the Learning Advantage visit


our website http://training.ugs.com or email us at
training @ugs.com

A
D
V
A
N
T
A
G
E

This page left blank intentionally.

STUDENT PROFILE
In order to stay in tune with our customers we ask for some background information. This information will be kept
confidential and will not be shared with anyone outside of Education Services.

Please Print

Your Name

U.S. citizen

Course Title/Dates

Yes

No

thru

Hotel/motel you are staying at during your training


Planned departure time on last day of class

Employer

Location

Your title and job responsibilities


Industry:

Auto

Aero

Consumer products

Machining

Tooling

Medical

Other

Types of products/parts/data that you work with


Reason for training
Please verify/add to this list of training for Unigraphics, I-deas, Imageware, Teamcenter Mfg., Teamcenter Eng. (I-Man), Teamcenter
Enterprise (Metaphase), or Dimensional Mgmt./Visualization. Medium means Instructor-lead (IL), On-line (OL), or Self-paced (SP)

Software

From Whom

When

Course Name

Medium

Other CAD/CAM/CAE /PDM software you have used

Please check! your ability/knowledge in the following


Subject
CAD modeling
CAD assemblies
CAD drafting
CAM
CAE
PDM data management
PDM system management

None

Novice

Intermediate

Advanced

Platform (operating system)

Thank you for your participation and we hope your training experience will be an outstanding one.

This page left blank intentionally.

NX2-NX4 CAD Transition Course Agenda


Monday

Morning
Introduction & Overview
Lesson 1.
Gateway General
Lesson 2.
Gateway Customization
Afternoon
Lesson 3.
Lesson 4.

Tuesday

Morning
Lesson 5.
Afternoon
Lesson 6.
Lesson 7.

Wednesday

Afternoon
Lesson 9.
Lesson 10.

Modeling Features, Part 1


Modeling Features, Part 2

Modeling Free Form Features, Part 1


Modeling Free Form Features, Part 2
Sketcher

Morning
Lesson 11.
Afternoon
Lesson 12.

Friday

Modeling General

Morning
Lesson 8.

Thursday

Visualization
Shape Studio

Modeling Curves
Assemblies

Morning
Lesson 13.
Lesson 14.
Afternoon
Lesson 15.

Drafting Part 1
Drafting Part 2
PMI

This page left blank intentionally.

Accelerators
The following Accelerators can be listed from within an NX session by choosing
InformationCustom MenubarAccelerators.
Function
FileNew...
FileOpen...
FileSave
FileSave As...
FilePlot...
FileExecuteGrip...
FileExecuteDebug Grip...
FileExecuteNX Open...
EditUndo
EditCut
EditCopy
Edit-Paste
EditDelete...
EditSelectionTop Selection Priority - Feature
EditSelectionTop Selection Priority - Face
EditSelectionTop Selection Priority - Body
EditSelectionTop Selection Priority - Edge
EditSelectionTop Selection Priority - Component
EditSelection-Select All
EditBlankBlank...
EditBlankReverse Blank All
EditBlankUnblank Selected...
EditBlankUnblank All of Part
EditTransform...
EditObject Display...
ViewOperationZoom...
ViewOperationRotate...
ViewOperationSection...
ViewLayoutNew...
ViewLayoutOpen...
ViewLayoutFit All Views
ViewVisualizationHigh Quality Image...
ViewInformation Window
ViewCurrent Dialog
ViewReset Orientation
InsertSketch...
InsertDesign FeatureExtrude...
InsertDesign FeatureRevolve...
InsertTrimTrimmed Sheet...

Accelerator
Ctrl+N
Ctrl+O
Ctrl+S
Ctrl+Shift+A
Ctrl+P
Ctrl+G
Ctrl+Shift+G
Ctrl+U
Ctrl+Z
Ctrl+X
Ctrl+C
Ctrl+V
Ctrl+D or Delete
F
G
B
E
C
Ctrl+A
Ctrl+B
Ctrl+Shift+B
Ctrl+Shift+K
Ctrl+Shift+U
Ctrl+T
Ctrl+J
Ctrl+Shift+Z
Ctrl+R
Ctrl+H
Ctrl+Shift+N
Ctrl+Shift+O
Ctrl+Shift+F
Ctrl+Shift+H
F4
F3
Ctrl+F8
S
X
R
T

InsertSweepVariational Sweep...
FormatLayer Settings...
FormatVisible in View...
FormatWCSDisplay
ToolsExpression...
ToolsJournalPlay...
ToolsJournalEdit
ToolsMacroStart Record...
ToolsMacroPlayback...
ToolsMacroStep...
InformationObject...
AnalysisCurveRefresh Curvature Graphs
PreferencesObject...
PreferencesSelection...
StartModeling...
StartAll ApplicationsShape Studio...
StartDrafting...
StartManufacturing...
StartNX Sheet Metal...
StartAssemblies
StartGateway...
HelpOn Context...
Refresh
Fit
Zoom
Rotate
Orient View-Trimetric
Orient View-Isometric
Orient View-Top
Orient View-Front
Orient View-Right
Orient View-Left
Snap View

V
Ctrl+L
Ctrl+Shift+V
W
Ctrl+E
Alt+F8
Alt+F11
Ctrl+Shift+R
Ctrl+Shift+P
Ctrl+Shift+S
Ctrl+I
Ctrl+Shift+C
Ctrl+Shift+J
Ctrl+Shift+T
M or Ctrl+M
Ctrl+Alt+S
Ctrl+Shift+D
Ctrl+Alt+M
Ctrl+Alt+N
A
Ctrl+W
F1
F5
Ctrl+F
F6
F7
Home
End
Ctrl+Alt+T
Ctrl+Alt+F
Ctrl+Alt+R
Ctrl+Alt+L
F8

Evaluation Delivery
NX2 NX4, Course #MT10026
Dates

thru

Please share your opinion in all of the following sections with a check in the appropriate box:

Instructor:
If there were 2 instructors, please evaluate the 2nd instructor with Xs

Instructor:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.

clearly explained the course objectives


was knowledgeable about the subject
answered my questions appropriately
encouraged questions in class
was well spoken and a good communicator
was well prepared to deliver the course
made good use of the training time
conducted themselves professionally
used examples relevant to the course and audience
provided enough time to complete the exercises
used review and summary to emphasize important information
did all they could to help the class meet the course objectives

Comments on overall impression of instructor(s):


Overall impression of instructor(s)

Poor

Excellent

Suggestions for improvement of course delivery:

What you liked best about the course delivery:

Class Logistics:
1. The training facilities were comfortable, clean, and provided a good learning
environment
2. The computer equipment was reliable
3. The software performed properly
4. The overhead projection unit was clear and working properly
5. The registration and confirmation process was efficient
Hotels: (We try to leverage this information to better accommodate our customers)
1. Name of the hotel
2.

Best hotel Ive stayed at

Was this hotel recommended during your registration process?

YES

NO

3. Problem? (brief description)

SEE BACK

Evaluation - Courseware
NX2 NX4, Course #MT10026
:

Please share your opinion for all of the following sections with a check in the appropriate box

Material:
1. The training material supported the course and lesson objectives
2. The training material contained all topics needed to complete the projects
3. The training material provided clear and descriptive directions
4. The training material was easy to read and understand
5. The course flowed in a logical and meaningful manner
6.

How appropriate was the length of the course relative to the material?

Too short

Too long

Just right

Comments on Course and Material:

Overall impression of course

Poor

Student:
1. I met the prerequisites for the class (I had the skills I needed)
2. My objectives were consistent with the course objectives
3. I will be able to use the skills I have learned on my job
4. My expectations for this course were met
5. I am confident that with practice I will become proficient

Name (optional):

Location/room

Please check this box if you would like your comments featured in our training publications.
(Your name is required at the bottom of this form)
Please check this box if you would like to receive more information on our other courses and services.
(Your name is required at the bottom of this form)

Thank you for your business. We hope to continue to provide your training
and personal development for the future.

Excellent